JP2024024082A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain attention to a displacement means. Since the visible surface of the third operating unit 800 is configured to be changeable as the third operating unit 800 is displaced, attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained. By relatively displacing the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880, the appearance of the third operating unit 800 can be changed, so that attention to the third operating unit 800 can be improved. Further, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement of the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880. That is, with only linear reciprocating displacement, the amount of displacement of the plurality of decorative members 870, 880 is likely to be reduced at the end of the displacement, and the plurality of decorative members 870, 880 may appear to be stationary, resulting in a decrease in the presentation effect. However, by mixing the displacement in the rotational direction, displacement in the rotational direction can be generated even at the end of the displacement of the linear displacement, so that the presentation effect can be improved. [Selection diagram] Figure 32

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a rotating base disposed at the tip of a base arm is configured to be rotatable multiple times (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116782

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain attention to the displacement means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member, a second displacement member, and a second displacement member. member, and is configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the displacement in the predetermined manner is such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other with reference to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together. It includes at least a first displacement and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate with respect to the gathering portion.

In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the displacement in the predetermined manner includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, by inverting the surface that is visually recognized by the third displacement, the game can be played before and after the third displacement. It is possible to make the decorations visible to the person noticeably different.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable prize winning device and a distribution device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable prize winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable prize winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable prize winning device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate of the variable prize winning device and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member of the sorting device in the first round in each jackpot type. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an extended state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the first operating unit in an extended state. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member due to rotational displacement of a rotational member. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle due to rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. 28. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. be. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. be. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an up-and-down reversal member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverting member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 2 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the drive mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are accessed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it becomes possible to shield various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 from being visible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of In the high probability state (during certain variation) in this embodiment, the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of variations (in this embodiment, 100 variations), and the probability of winning a second symbol (described later) increases, resulting in a second This includes a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more easily than when the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window of the base plate 60. It is set up. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for displaying fluctuations. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 140a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). will also be displayed lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 140, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various parts (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. In FIG. 6(a), the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning opening 65a, and in FIG. The opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 changes the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state so that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b can be received and guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right center of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are limited to those that deviate from the electric accessory 140a and drift down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right center portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward as it goes toward the back side from the lower end of the front end which is arranged opposite to the front end). The degree to which momentum is lost due to collision can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either in the front or the rear. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in side view is arranged at the lower front side, thereby making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening/closing plate 65b side. Further, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left and right widths become smaller toward the bottom at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the balls that have landed on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without leakage. On the near side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right outward by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the right and left sides of the inclined flow downward surface 163a1, guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined downward flow surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner walls of the receiving member 163 to the front side and the left and right inner side, and has a front end surface as an inclined surface whose arrangement is shifted rearward as the left and right inner side increases. It is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the slope, so that the ball can be guided down the slope. 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts its closing operation with a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is located on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will not continue. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, if the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that is swept backward due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening/closing plate 65b (in the front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b will open unintentionally or otherwise malfunction.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b closes by a rising motion. That is, the ball that landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so it does not come close to the left or right position of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, but instead lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The balls being ridden are almost always guided to the specific winning hole 65a.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged closer to the left and right outer sides or there are a large number of balls, there is a possibility that the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will be delayed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific prize opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

Moreover, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed into a flat shape (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward, and then flows in the left and right direction due to the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will once move backward in parallel, so it is possible to avoid the balls colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b has a horizontally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a and a horizontal flow is formed in the rolling ball, the rolling surface on the opening/closing plate 65b is Since the possibility that the movement of the ball will become irregular can be reduced, unintended malfunctions can be prevented.

The receiving member 163 is formed with contact surface portions 163a3 that come into contact with the rotating tips at both left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby increasing the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b. There is. The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of left and right sides, and are designed to have a shape that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact, so that the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily stabilized. In addition, by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening/closing plate 65b with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the ball from flowing downward is disposed on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured so as not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is chipped, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 This is intended to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. Thereby, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since contact with the opening/closing plate 65b occurs when the contact surface portion 163a3 has a normal shape, there may be a disadvantage that load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball that is being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be configured to be received by being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

That is, in the state in which the ball is being accepted (for example, in a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball does not match the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down inside the specific winning a prize opening 65a by being guided by its curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where a ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming section 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path forming section 336. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged on the right and left sides of the electric accessory 140a. limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to the left and right outer positions than the electric accessory 140a. Thereby, on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to secure visibility at the left and right inner positions than the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be explained. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG.7 and FIG.8, the state where the structure other than the 1st winning a prize opening 64, the 2nd winning a prize opening 140, and the variable winning a prize device 65 among the structures arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, there are balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). A collection gutter 150 is provided in which a path for flowing the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the groove-shaped portion facing the base plate 60 is open. By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for the ball that enters the first winning port 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path for the ball that enters the second winning port 140. and a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form flow paths for the ball that enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on both the left and right sides, respectively.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left direction, and the second flow path section 152 slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right direction. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending below the general winning a prize opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, although the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the gaming area, the flow of the balls that enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is , are moved from the center position to the left and right sides by the collecting gutter 150. Thereby, a space can be provided below the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and this space can be used to arrange the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300. It is an exploded rear perspective view of. Note that in FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, and illustrations of other parts are omitted, and illustrations of other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, The base of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, collection gutter 150, and distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

In the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collection gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collection gutter 150, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are, whether the distribution device 300 is provided or the distribution device 300 is not provided. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 can be used in common.

Next, details of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the gaming area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution device 300 constitutes a downstream path through which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change based on the detection result of the ball flowing down the downstream path of the distribution device 300, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member disposed on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and a receiving member 163 is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive the ball that has passed through the specific prize opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connecting part with the sorting device 300; A state switching device 165 is fastened to and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether electricity is applied or not.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is a flat surface except for the through hole for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific prize opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the back side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the back side inside the thin wall portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 at the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin wall portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through hole of a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be placed is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary part 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate-like shape that is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extended support plates 161b having a substantially T-shape, including a longitudinally elongated plate-like part extending downward at a midway position of the laterally elongated plate-like part.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the rear range of the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support part 161c protrudes from the horizontally long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support part 161d protrudes from the vertically long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary part 161a. The protruding support portion 161e that protrudes from the top surface of the portion has a function of supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical protruding part 161f protruding in a symmetrical shape below the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a contacts the balls flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the balls flowing down. Has a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened parts 161h having internal threads for screwing fastening screws inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary part 161a.

The fastened portion 161i, which has a female thread portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is arranged outside the border portion 161a at the cut (left and right center position) of the border portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, there is a connecting portion between the through hole for passing through the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for passing through the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the fastened portion 161i is disposed.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down within the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161.

On the back side of the front design member 162, there are a plurality of female screws arranged at positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161, and each having a female threaded portion formed in such a manner that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole 161g can be screwed into. It includes a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c that extend toward the back side and have a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

The extending parts 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened part 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened part 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the downward flow path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball riding on the portion 162b from flowing to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations on both the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inwards, so that the ball flowing on the extending portions 162c is The downstream path can be summarized as the downstream path of the ball riding on the extension portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the falling balls are placed (increasing the density of ball placement) compared to the number of falling balls, and to reduce the area where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (where the falling path is (a space that is not constructed) can be secured.

Although the front design member 162 illustrated in FIG. 11 is shown in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by pasting a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 in a geometric pattern, and the groove may be illuminated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent with a plain color or with the above-described decoration added.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, a contact surface portion 163a3, and an auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , a lower surface portion 163a forming a downstream surface on the inside of the frame, a ball passage hole 163b provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c into which the fastening screws arranged in and fastened and fixed to the fastened part 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female threaded part into which the fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and which are located in the left and right center. It includes a pair of fastened parts 163d disposed on the sides, and a plurality of fastened parts 163e each having a female threaded part into which a fastening screw inserted into the state switching device 165 is screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer ends with the left-right center portion as the apex, and an inclined flow that slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step lower from the left and right outer ends of the left-right inclined surface. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so that it can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a main body part 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downwardly toward the rear, and a fastened part of the receiving member 163 that is formed through the upper side of the main body part 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b into which the fastening screws screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is arranged, and both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened parts 164d formed with female threads into which fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened part 164d formed through the upper part of the main body part 164a to be fastened with the fixed member 161. It includes an insertion hole 164e into which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting board 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LED is arranged facing obliquely forward and upward, and when viewed from the front, the light emitting board 164c is positioned directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6), and the second winning prize It is placed directly below the mouth 140. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of a player who desires to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes at the spot diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to light up when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a The player can easily understand whether or not a problem has occurred.

With the above-described configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be fixed more firmly than the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. Further, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the arrangement of the sorting device 300 between the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 and Relative positional displacement can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws screwed into the fastened part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat radiation. A lower case part 165b formed in the shape of a deep box with an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, and an electromagnetic solenoid 165c that is engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and a rotating portion that is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in an arrangement such that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the sliding portion 165d slides. It includes a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted through a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that a rod-shaped portion can be engaged therein, and a transmission protrusion 65c protruding rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b enters into this recessed portion. engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft portion 65d that forms a rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing plate 65b can be opened/closed in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted. , a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted; A substrate 350 is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side, and a substrate 350 is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and changes its state depending on whether or not it is energized. a state switching device 360 that is configured to be able to switch; a slide displacement member 370 that is disposed below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched; An insertion hole is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and is formed through the hole so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough. and a lower member 380 having 381.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which the balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b flow down in the following order: inside the upper member 310, flow path forming parts 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. However, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are configured so that they can be seen by the player, and the way they flow down provides not only a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also provides the player with an effect. It produces an effect related to gaming profits, such as causing a change in profits.

Differences in the manner in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380, the position of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to focus on the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It has been devised with the premise of concentration.

Next, details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The upper member 310 is a thin member made of a light-transmissive resin material and has a U-shape when viewed from above, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed through the hole so as to be able to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent seal members 313 that are pasted as a seal member 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 toward the front side along the outer periphery, and an inner member a plurality of insertion cylinder parts 315 in which through-holes are formed into which fastening screws inserted into the inner member 330 can be inserted; a fastened part 316 having a female thread into which the fastening screws inserted into the middle member 330 can be inserted; A pair of longitudinally elongated protrusions 317, which are longitudinally elongated portions that protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are arranged side by side, and A pair of left and right inner protrusions 318 that are elongated in the left and right direction and are disposed between a pair of front and rear elongated protrusions 317; A pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 that are protrudingly provided and elongated in the left and right direction and are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long protrusions 317 and a size that allows the upper part of the board 350 to be placed therein. and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess.

The opening 312 is a passage-like part (tunnel-like part) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable prize winning device 65 and flows it downward, and the upper front edge is connected to the tilted posture detection sensor SE1 ( (see FIG. 12) is cut with an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. Thereby, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the attention of the player by receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the board 350 and being visually recognized brilliantly, but the details will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the downward flow path of the ball below the upper member 310. A first upper surface part 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface part connected to the front end of the first upper surface part 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. By configuring the left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b to be longer toward the near side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who views the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface side to receive the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, although the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visible to the player.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having a female threaded portion formed in the middle member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion cylinder portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the threaded portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, although the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made less noticeable to the player viewing the screw head from diagonally above. Thereby, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from becoming poor due to the fastening screws.

The reason why the fastened part 316 is only formed on the right side is because the insertion tube part 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, so one fastening position is sufficient on the front side, and the screw head is facing downward. The reason for this is that the appearance of the sorting device 300 will be better if the arrangement is omitted if it is unnecessary, even if it is less noticeable. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.

The fastened portion 316 is arranged at a position that avoids the downward path of the balls and minimizes deterioration in the appearance of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

The lower surfaces of the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the left and right outer protrusions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved with the same location as a reference, and the arrangement becomes lower as the distance from that location increases. Formed as a surface. This curved surface has different shapes for the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, the left and right inner protruding portions 318, and the left and right outer protruding portions 319, and this difference in shape is intended to control the manner in which the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a box-like shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 and forming a downward flow path for the ball; A pair of second flow path forming portions 335 connected to the front end portion of the flow path forming portion 334 to form a flow path for the sphere and recessed in the front side of the front frame portion 333; and the second flow path forming portions. A pair of third flow path forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 335 to form a flow path for the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the middle member 330 includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and is formed penetrating the lower bottom of the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for the ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangle formed from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. A pair of alignment protrusions 339 are provided as protrusions.

The rear frame portion 332 does not constitute a downward flow path for the ball, unlike the front side portion that configures a downward flow path for the ball, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a that is formed vertically through the front end of the left and right center portions and is configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be placed therein, and a through hole that is elongated in the left and right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b are formed through the lower bottom portion and guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a female screw portion is formed into which a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed. It includes a fastened part 332c and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female screw part at its upper end into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

Since the front frame portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inner side of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 is reduced. The front frame portion 333 is formed into a frame shape that is approximately square in top view, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Equipped with.

The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 are parts that configure the flow path of the ball, and are arranged so that the flow direction of the ball, the inclination angle, etc. are different. The details will be explained later.

In addition, the open part 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 allows the symmetrical protruding part 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable prize winning device 65 to enter. This is a gap for the purpose of That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter into the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge hole 337 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and is configured in a pair on the left and right, and is formed in a size that allows the ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it is configured to have a horizontal length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through hole of the detection sensor SE1. All you have to do is design the shape.

In addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming part 336 as described above, the partition plate part 338 also functions as a guide part that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, but the details will be described later. The positioning protrusion 339 is a part that is fitted into the protrusion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower side part 353 is longer than the upper side part 352 from side to side, and a recess for positioning is provided at the lower end on the left end side of the lower side part 353. 354.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 for positioning in the left and right direction, and the left and right elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 back and forth. The upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off upward, thereby fixing the arrangement. However, the details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. a sliding portion 362 that is engaged with and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and rotates as the slide portion 362 slides. , is provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes from the right side to the right, and a lower side. A guided portion 362c is provided that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of and is formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is a portion that is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, since it is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating part 363 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed into a vertically elongated cylindrical shape at the L-shaped connection part, and has a penetrating portion large enough to allow the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted therethrough. A supporting cylinder part 363a having a hole, an upper cylinder part 363b which projects upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into a through-hole of the overhang part 362b, and a longitudinal part of the L-shape A lower cylindrical portion 363c is provided that protrudes downward from the side tip portion in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable about the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized to cause the plunger to slide and the slide portion 362 to be displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted into the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced, and accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is A thin plate part 371 that is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the thin plate part 380, an upper protruding part 376 that protrudes upward from the thin plate part 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper protruding part 376. A recessed portion 378 is provided at the protruding end of the protruding portion that protrudes upward at the portion, and is formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of supported holes 371a penetrating the left and right portions in the rear half portion, and a longitudinally elongated shape with a left and right width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper protruding portion 376 from the front end in the left and right center portions. A recessed part 372, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that protrude downward in the shape of protrusions along the edges of the recessed part 372, and protrusions along the left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of vertical protrusions 374 are provided in a strip shape and protrude in both up and down directions, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 is provided in a cylindrical shape and protrudes downward from the rear end portion and is inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Be prepared.

The lower protrusion portion 373 and the upper and lower protrusion portions 374 are portions that are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides, and compared to contact on a plane, the middle member 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protruding portion 376 is a columnar portion having a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper protruding portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376.

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 between the left and right inner gaps, and is configured to suppress displacement in the left-right direction by contacting the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be well guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole elongated in the left-right direction so as to be able to accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 necessary to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-back direction. Ru.

The protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom part of the rear frame part 332, so that the lower cylindrical part of the rotating part 363 The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is such that the entire area where the upper protruding part 376 through which the insertion is planned and the protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is located inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like part 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated from side to side, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors on the lower side of the plate-like part 382. It includes a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are open, and the other portions are closed. is formed.

The plate-shaped part 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, similar to the vertical through-hole formed in the sensor holding frame part 389. A protrusion 383 that is elongated and protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of protrusions that protrude left and right away from the front end of the protrusion 383. a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at a position on the rear side of the protrusion 383; A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer positions than , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape protruding rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed so as to allow insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330. .

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left and right thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed part 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 is configured such that the protrusion 383 is sandwiched between the recessed part 372. Placed. That is, the protruding portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed such that the left and right inner ends are at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are fitted in such a way that they are in contact with the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right sides of the middle member 330 are aligned with respect to the lower member 380. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, by bringing the back surface of the frame front part of the lower member 380 (the part that connects the protrusion part 383 and the protrusion part 383a on the front end side) into contact with the front face of the alignment protrusion part 339, the lower The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid positional deviation between the third flow path forming part 336 as a structure of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in a horizontally elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383, so that, for example, the end of the displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protruding portion 383 can be improved compared to the structure. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

Note that even if the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, it is not a part that would immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, although the guide protrusion 384 is normally designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period of time (for example, 3 years) without damage, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed taking into consideration that they will be used in a state where they collide with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the lifespan of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the design may be such that the strength of the protrusion 383 can withstand the remaining period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in its shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused by a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the middle member 330. In this embodiment, the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided to flow down, and the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. Further, the insertion hole 388 is arranged on the left and right outer sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of parts, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate part 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed part 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-back direction. As a result, the load during guidance can be shared among multiple positions, so it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but by a plurality of members, at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper protrusions 376 are guided by the partition plate part 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed part 372 is guided by the protrusion part 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are improperly assembled and the positional deviation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 will be inhibited. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 keep the displacement to a small value as they are parts that continuously constitute the flow path of the ball, and since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is said to be good, It is possible to guarantee that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the positional deviation of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes too large, the slide displacement member 370 will not be displaced properly. , control can be performed to issue an error notification based on the possibility that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is incorrect.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in a poor state, and therefore it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Note that, here, a configuration related to the falling of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and a configuration that enters the downstream path of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state arranged at the front side position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be explained.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335 that follows, and the third flow path configuration section 336 that follows are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is formed with the flow direction of the balls flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 as a reference. The third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in the left and right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that flows in the same direction as the previous rotation direction with respect to the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down on the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right-angled bending angle, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow speed of the ball increases toward the downstream side. To be more specific, the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the subsequent flow direction at the second flow path forming part 335 does not have a front-rear component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path forming part 336 following the second flow path forming part 335, the flow is directed backward, which is opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming part 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front and back direction. It is possible to realize a flow pattern with less influence.

Therefore, for example, unlike a downward flow mode in which the balls consistently flow down in the same direction (for example, to the left) from beginning to end, it is possible to easily prevent the downward speed of the balls from becoming excessive on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to make the falling speed of the ball uniform throughout the channel, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention of the player to the ball, and it is easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming portion 335, but if the second flow path forming portion 335 is formed, clogging of the bulb and backflow can be more easily prevented. When the second flow path configuration section 335 is not formed (when the left-right length of the second flow path configuration section 335 is 0), that is, the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 are When connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the direction of the ball's flow is large, and in particular, the speed direction must be reversed back and forth, so it is difficult to flow the ball smoothly, and balls are likely to accumulate, become clogged, or backflow, causing problems. may occur.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the switching angle of the flowing direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), no reversal of the velocity direction of the ball occurs, so that the ball can flow down smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid ball stagnation, clogging, and backflow.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 will be explained. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protruding part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion located downstream of the ball is further retreated from the path of the ball than a portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f disposed opposite to each other is longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right sides of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow path side surfaces of the second flow path forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (Fig. 17 reference).

Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from causing a backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connecting end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed in a curve at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that is arranged downward toward the front side is provided so as to protrude upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the ball in a manner that bends the direction in which the ball flows down.

That is, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first channel forming section 334, and contacts the side wall section 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the direction of flow, and passing through the second channel forming section 334. The liquid flows down the flow path forming part 335, contacts the symmetrical protrusion 161f while flowing down, switches the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed into a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the protruding support portion 161d of the member to be fixed 161. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

The inclination angle and length ratio in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be explained. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third The flow path forming portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and the common inclination angle is set to be slightly gentler in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 has a front frame part 333 formed in a square shape in top view as an inner side surface, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame part 333. It is formed so that the outer side surface is a large square. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-mentioned large square is 45 mm, so that a flow path with a width of 12 mm is created around the periphery. It is formed.

Therefore, for a normally used ball with a diameter of 11 mm, the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the ball, so the ball will flow down with almost no displacement in the width direction. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Fig. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Fig. 1) is defined as approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance; Can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the ends of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the square-shaped front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path configuration part 334 is Since only the constituting curved protrusion 334b is arranged inside (on the front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path forming section 334 is connected to the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336. It's relatively short.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the channels formed by the second channel forming section 335 and the third channel forming section 336 have approximately the same length (33 mm between sphere centers), and the length is as follows. The length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

From the ratio of the longitudinal inclination angle and length of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 described above, it can be explained that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is not constant. In other words, the time taken to pass through the first flow path forming section 334, which has the largest inclination angle and the shortest path length, is longer than the time required to pass through the second flow path forming section 335, where the inclination angle is gentler and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And it is shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path forming part 336.

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement is moved to the back side, and a portion is hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1. The ball can be quickly displaced to the front side from a state where the visibility of the ball is poor, and the state can be switched to a state where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move his/her line of sight towards the ball, reducing the burden on the player who focuses on the ball (eyeball movement). eye strain) can be reduced.

When focusing on the balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, which have high visibility in this way, the balls flow down in the left and right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case where the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming part 336, the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is smaller, which reduces the gaming burden on the player who focuses on the ball. , can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 are the same. are considered to be equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball in front view is different, as a result, the apparent velocity of the ball (displacement velocity of the ball in front view) is lower than that of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. The ball flowing down is slower than the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335.

The flow path of the ball only changes at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easy to draw attention to, and in other parts, the flow path of the ball changes from each flow path forming part 334 to 336. It is considered common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight naturally tends to concentrate on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, it is possible to effectively reduce the gaming burden on the player who concentrates his/her line of sight in this manner.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the player's view of the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, in this embodiment, an open section 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path forming section 335. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid the flesh part of the second flow path forming part 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path forming part 336.

Further, in the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a, only the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the falling ball is formed, and the formation of the shaped portion on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed to have a thickness vertically, the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is less likely to be obstructed by the symmetrical protruding portion 161f. It can be lowered and visibility can be improved.

Further, the configuration is such that the balls deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and heading toward the outlet 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming part 336, contacts the curved surface part 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow path structure 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path structure 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are visually recognized as being overlapped from front to back, so pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or the ball enters the out port 71 without entering the specific winning port 65a, the ball enters the field of view that focuses on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the ball heads toward the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the configuration of the nails implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge), many of the fired balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion (the portion that attracts the player's attention) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is located at a position that overlaps in the front-back direction the position where the balls (excluding the balls that entered the ball 64 and 140) gather. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the flowing ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is improved except for the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. It is configured to reduce the

For example, on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed in a shape similar to a prism to produce a light diffusion effect. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as having a sawtooth shape is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed over almost the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and above and below.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, so while it is possible to make the surface shine brilliantly, it also prevents the line of sight from being blocked by the light. visibility of the rear side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, visibility is poor in a state where light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when no light is irradiated, visibility is at least as low as in a state where light is irradiated. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a blocking object between the light and the light, the shadow of the blocking object will be visually recognized as a black spot, making it easier to determine its position.

Processed surfaces similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b are also formed in other parts. For example, there is a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side of the left and right external protrusions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side of the front frame of the rear frame portion 332, etc. (Fig. 17 reference).

Further, a processed surface formed in a similar shape is a plate-shaped part extending to the back side of the second upper surface part 314b of the upper member 310, and which is attached to the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in this embodiment, light is diffused on the back side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. A processed surface is formed to create the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed to the left and right from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes looking at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The ball can be hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 to instantly make it difficult to see.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen, from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336 when viewed diagonally from above. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, the light is irradiated onto the light diffusion processed surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball has flowed down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336, it is necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. , it is possible to further improve attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state can be created in which the shadow of the sphere can be easily recognized as a black spot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, visibility of the ball can be switched between good and bad. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the sunspot, it is possible to create a situation in which the sunspot is hidden by the ball and a situation in which the sunspot is visible without being hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the flow formed by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 consistently It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

This can prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. The effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Further, it is possible to prevent the balls from coming into contact with the light-diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, thereby preventing the balls from flowing down or being subjected to deceleration effects. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the channel, the visibility of the ball is reduced even while the ball is flowing down the channel formed by the channel components 334 to 336. This can be avoided.

Note that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to produce an effect of light diffusion and an effect of decelerating the sphere by collision with the sphere.

In the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility remains high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility of the fastening screws is reduced.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used to hide a portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screws reflect the light and shine, so that the light is diffused. The visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and its purpose is not only to make it shine brilliantly, but also to protect the substrate 350 disposed on the back side. and causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The board 350 is accommodated in a supported manner in the rear frame-shaped part 332 of the middle member 330, and is arranged with a gap between the bottom and the bottom of the rear frame-shaped part 332 at the left and right center parts, and can slide into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

To be more specific, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower part 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame part 332 from the front and back at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 is provided with a thick wall portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, there is a gap due to the lack of this wall thickness. The slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper part 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front and rear directions.

Therefore, by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a glittering effect, and further, the back side of the intervening member 164 Visibility in the range can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it can appear as if light is emitting from above and below the specific winning hole 65a.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left and right center position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged at the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the field of view and it will not be good. Since it cannot be visually recognized, sufficient effects can be achieved if it is formed within the arrangement gap of at least one pair of detection sensors SE1.

Note that the lower part 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate light toward the sealing member 313 and the part disposed below the sealing member 313 through which the sphere flows, but the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

19 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 19 and 20, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and include a probability change detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 that have a common function. The probability change detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from the detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is a ball entering sensor that causes a payout of a prize ball. That is, when it is detected that the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind the ball, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls for each detection) are paid out. The money is paid out to the player by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but is used as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the jackpot game by detecting the ball entering. Function.

Note that, as described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to the variable probability state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not a jackpot will be won next time.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 covers the upper side of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11 is The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member, and is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the flow path side concave, the flowing ball can be smoothly directed toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 is retracted backward from above the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and is inserted into the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11. Passage of the ball is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, but has passed only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the types of jackpots are variable jackpot and normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 are prepared for each type of jackpot.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variable jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, details of the control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, many fraudulent acts in which the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is illegally changed have been discovered, and countermeasures against such acts are important.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and sliding portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are placed on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is placed on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the recess of the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion inserted into the mounting portion 378 to the rear side. This is a normal operating mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraud may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed to the back side, thereby attempting to fraudulently create a state in which the ball can enter the accurate change detection sensor SE11. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 is arranged below the bottom part of the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18). When passing the thin metal wire through the path forming portion 336 and pressing it against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press it against the front end of the thin plate portion 371, and the wire must be pressed against the upper protruding portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 has a curved surface shape that releases the load to the left and right sides as described above, so even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load cannot be released to the left and right sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is incorrectly displaced to the rear position.

Furthermore, in addition to the fact that the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but winds in a spiral, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged far from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the back side. (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in many cases, the configuration was such that the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 was maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. However, the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. In contrast, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 to be difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be designed freely. You can increase the degree.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire passed through the third flow path forming section 336, the thin metal wire itself will cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming section 336. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit that the player obtains varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so avoid balls that enter the ball incorrectly as much as possible. It is advisable to avoid it.

Conventional models are usually configured to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the ball entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is permitted, but in this embodiment, the probability variation detection In the state where the ball enters the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), there is no movable member that restricts the ball entering the normal detection sensor SE12, and the ball does not enter the normal detection sensor SE12 either. This is a configuration that allows for

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls flowing down passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the probability variation state after the jackpot game is ensured. In this embodiment, based on this idea, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. Further, since no movable members are disposed, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable members is not required, and the usage life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifespan of the movable members.

On the other hand, as a device other than the movable member, in order to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 were improved. The shape and shape have been devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position is provided in a portion fixedly disposed inside the flow path (i.e., a protrusion). This is achieved by the shape of the mounting portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, we will explain how to improve the shape of the flow path. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal as it goes toward the center side in the left-right direction (the partition plate portion 338 side) in the transverse direction. (See Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set to be similar in angle and direction to the longitudinal direction inclination of the second flow path forming part 335, so that the inclination from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336 is The bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (the bouncing in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338) can be reduced.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be placed on the side close to the partition plate part 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the rear position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate part 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the left-right direction path of the flow path constituted by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path forming part 335. Since the inclination direction is on the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated inward in the left-right direction. This can also reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 located apart from the partition plate section 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be explained. The ball that has flowed down the third flow path forming part 336 is first placed close to the left and right inner protrusions 318 . The left and right inner protruding portion 318 is the smallest of the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is disposed on the front side, it comes into contact with the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 while sliding on the partition plate section 338 without leaking.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as downwardly concave curved surfaces when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is more horizontal than the front end side of the protrusion. It is formed to expand outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and has come into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows downward. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not alone determine whether the downward direction of the ball is downward or outward to the left and right; Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after contacting the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained separately. When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protrusion 376 and the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding end portion of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protruding portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the direction of flow of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface that starts from the left and right inner sides and ends at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose ending point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See Figure 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outer sides, and the ball, which is given momentum to the left and right outer sides by contacting with the left and right inner protrusions 318, utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows outward to the left and right, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the ball bouncing, the ball can flow down smoothly. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the downward direction of the ball but to suppress the ball's bounce, its shape is significantly different from the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, and the protruding ends are connected to the probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front side than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right external protrusions 319 When the provided portion 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be located on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right externally protruded portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a backward component to the ball, so that the ball does not flow back to the front side. can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion 376 are retracted to the rear of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, so that the ball is moved closer to the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317. flows in contact with.

The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal line passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is located directly behind the position, it is easy to apply a load to the abutting ball with the left and right components suppressed. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely downward to the front because the protruding tip of the longitudinally long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that did not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318 is loaded obliquely forward and downward by the load from the front-rear long protrusions 317, and flows toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Here, there is a possibility that the ball may rebound to the front side (reverse flow occurs) depending on the impact point at the time of collision with the front-rear long protrusion 317, but in this embodiment, as described above, Since the ball is forced diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the mounting portion 318, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball will not be able to reach the rear end of the lower bottom of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the ball. , it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the liquid only collides with the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see FIG. 19) and flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the rear position and the ball flows toward the definite variation detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the front position and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced from the left and right inner protrusions 318 toward the left and right outer sides due to the load. This use will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position, and while the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 When 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load will be applied to the ball, and a load will be applied to the ball in a direction (forward) that will cause the flow to flow backward through the third flow path forming part 336. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 that is in operation can be eliminated, so there is a possibility that the ball will flow backwards. can be made less sensitive.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without exception. The effect of guiding the ball that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow backwards.

Further, the opening operation (movement from the front position to the rear position) of the slide displacement member 370 is not an operation in a direction opposed to the ball, but a movement away from the ball. Even if an action is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that would push the ball back toward the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, even if the opening operation is controlled to be executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, it is thought that the backflow of the balls will not be likely to occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still in the preliminary stage of flowing outward to the left and right), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and it is easy to shift it to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 performs an opening operation while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the previous rolling. , it is possible to easily guide the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, which includes the above-mentioned sorting device 300, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be explained. In the following, as an example, cases will be explained in which the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different.

21 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, play the game by keeping your head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a horizontal line of sight or in a direction that is inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is tilted downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly by comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that in FIGS. 21 to 23, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state for convenience.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated in imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for ease of understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 disposed at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half disposed on the lower part 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, the sealing member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, so when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the area around the sealing member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. Since the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be drawn to the attention.

Note that on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted (see FIG. 18). Thereby, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually recognized as being stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processed surface 332e, and the area around the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Note that the light emission control is not limited in any way, but for example, it may be controlled to irradiate the sealing member 313 with light in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third channel forming part 336 during a jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the seal member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 disposed directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 emits light, while when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 is caused to emit light. When the ball enters the ball, by controlling the light emitting means 351, which is usually placed directly above the detection sensor SE12, to emit light, the player can be informed of the location where the ball has passed.

Light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a vertically spread range (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path forming part 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to grasp changes due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is narrower, compared to the direction seen in FIG. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to confirm the change in the downward flow mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Note that since the placement through hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening with a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370, the inside of the rear frame portion 332 The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) located in the front panel can be hidden so that it is difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize opening 65a during the round game and flow down each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of balls are arranged in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the balls on the back side is obstructed by the balls on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of balls are arranged in the third flow path forming part 336, those balls are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the ball on the far side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

Further, when the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side, it flows outward from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right. After the ball comes off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion processed surface 333b of the front frame part 333, so the movement of the ball during the process of coming off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction It is preferable to grasp the flow from the downstream end position (ball P1 position) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (ball P2 position) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a ball (a ball that is slightly displaced from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction), the ball that is in the process of coming off from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction is hidden by that ball.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the variable detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether or not the direction of flow of the ball has been switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. This can be done by visually checking, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the vicinity of the right edge. In contrast, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and right side of the third flow path configuration part 336 The ball is configured to be able to flow down along a path including around the edge (movement from the position of the ball P1 to the position of the ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, a situation may arise in which it is not possible to ascertain whether the ball has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the balls flowing through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and the balls flowing through the second flow path forming part 335 are clearly separated by the vertical arrangement, so the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball becomes a blindfold. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized when viewed from the direction becomes smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 flows diagonally downward to the right, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, and then heads toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. The downstream route and the downstream route toward the normal detection sensor SE12 are switched. Therefore, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than when the ball's falling path is switched by either the ball flowing straight down or the ball's flowing direction being switched to the right.

Another possible switching mode is a case where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched either directly down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inward protruding portions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming part 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball is displaced below the bottom of the third flow path forming part 336. By falling (falling by the vertical difference between the lower bottom upper surface of the third flow path forming part 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate part 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is attached to the third flow path forming part 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the ball, the ball is also partially hidden by the front frame portion 333 by displacing the ball to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, the visible area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the player's perspective becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the downstream direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336, , each has its advantages and disadvantages. This allows the player to adjust and select his or her preferred viewing method, rather than requiring the player to play the game in a single-minded way, even when it comes to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion 336 can be in a state as if removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized.

Regarding the directional views in FIGS. 22 and 23, visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, so the thickness of the members allows for transparency. Because there is less light, visibility will be obstructed.

Since the range in which the field of view is obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 in the directional view in FIG. 23 than in the directional view in FIG. 22. There is sex.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is difficult to occur (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it is possible to avoid poor visibility of the sorting device 300.

Even the parts that cannot be made flat due to functionality are formed so as to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support parts 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are designed to prevent players looking at the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 from obstructing the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is located outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thinly with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the ball that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65a flows down and flows down towards the out opening 71. The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be explained.

22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that flows down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. The ball deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portion 162b and the extended portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 are located below the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 cause each flow path to be It is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area, similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. , similar to the ball flowing down the second channel forming part 335, has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the gaming area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path forming section 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same (left and right center position), by moving the player's line of sight up and down, the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the constituent parts 336 are visible.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the gaming area can easily enter the specific winning hole 65a efficiently (or whether the number of wasted balls during the jackpot game can be reduced) may deviate and form the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. 162c (or whether useless balls frequently occur during a jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path configuration section 336 by the balls flowing down. can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. In the case where the player's line of sight deviates from the inner rail 61, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

Normally, a ball heading toward the out port 71 is considered a waste ball and does not have any effect in the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, the player's line of sight is directed toward the ball heading toward the out port 71. It can have a role of guiding the flow path to the third flow path forming part 336.

Note that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming part 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path forming part 335. There is sex.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 and an electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and a third flow path configuration part 336 is arranged below the left-right middle position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so the ball can be prevented from flowing down the front side of the third channel forming part 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its rear end portion is reduced due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the time required for the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the shape growth of the channel forming parts 334 to 336, but this arrangement is likely to cause this problem. Efforts are being made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path forming part 336. is formed short.

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the lower rear of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), the player's line of sight frequently occurs diagonally downward to the rear as shown in FIG. 23. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so closely that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 bites into the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a configured to be long on the left and right and passes through the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends has a symmetrical flow path configuration. It is collected at the lower left and right center side of the specific winning a prize opening 65a via the sections 334 to 336. Thereby, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left and right direction. In addition, since the structure required as the downward flow path of the ball can be made so that the horizontal length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. can.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning a prize opening 65a close to the out opening 71, but instead of having a structure in which the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, the second flow path forming part 335 By adopting a structure in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path structure section 335 by the third flow path structure section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387) An opening) can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path forming portion 335. Thereby, the vertical distance between the specific winning a prize opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by being able to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's perspective, it is possible to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370, so that it is possible to Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area can be improved.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning hole 65a can be placed near the lower end of the gaming area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a symmetrical gaming area.

Next, an example of the flow of the ball after it enters the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessory (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into consideration will be described.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down in order through the first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is approximately 0.3 seconds. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds for it to pass through the second flow path forming part 335, and it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration section 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball will be placed at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 for 0.9 seconds. The ball is configured so that it will never reach the detection sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, it is possible to design the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 without fear of hitting the ball incorrectly.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winnings to the V winning sensor, which is commonly found in pachinko machines equipped with a V-probability variable attacker, there is a control to release the opening/closing board for a short time at the start of the round game R. control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. As a result, the operation mode of the opening/closing board that opens and closes the specific winning hole becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment where he or she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-probability variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the V-probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, the ball that enters the ball immediately after the release of the V-probability variable attacker On the contrary, the entering ball produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the ball), so it is not necessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering immediately after release. .

Note that the time required for the ball to pass can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth, uneven, etc.).

With reference to FIG. 24, the contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 19", and the jackpot A2 is associated with and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 39" is defined in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot B2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "40 to 49" (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot C1 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 79" (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C1, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot C2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, which will be described later. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 140) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140), a 15-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery, you can get a larger amount of payout prize balls than if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to increase the motivation for playing the game for drawing No. 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will become large. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, which has the disadvantage that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, the special symbol 2 lottery By setting the operation pattern of the variable prize winning device 65 for the jackpot in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and highlight only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game. .

That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the special symbol 2 lottery will be delayed, so it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (time efficient for paying out prize balls).

Note that the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled according to the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacement operation, and increase the player's interest.

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with good profit balance) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the winning of the normal symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing time-based changes in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below. In addition, in the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In addition, in this control example, the drive mode differs depending on the jackpot type only in the first round, and the drive mode is common from the second round onward. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be explained.

In the case of jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "balls entering consecutively"). It is not our intention to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible for one ball to arrive at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a and enter the specific winning hole 65a at once.

In the case of jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific prize opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As mentioned above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is based on the idea that the time is shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, and that the ball passes through the third flow path forming part. This is set based on the idea that the time is longer than the time required to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a, Even if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball disposed in the third flow path forming part 336, regardless of the timing of the ball's entry. (See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming conspicuous, and attract attention to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball enters the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336, so there is a low possibility that the line of sight will be obstructed by the ball, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming part 335 is arranged close to the front plate part of the fixed member 161 and closer to the front side than the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight is tends to collect in the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is This makes it easier to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, each of the channel forming parts 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the left and right centers, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on one side of the left and right, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. By paying attention to the rear of the third flow path constituting section 336 on the side that is not being moved, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the falling balls (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving the attention to the ball. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily visually confirm whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 seconds. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time to allow a plurality of balls to enter in a row on either side of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "entering with consecutive balls").

In this control example, the firing interval of the balls is set at 0.6 second intervals, so even if the falling interval of the balls has not changed from the time of firing, the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. During this time, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 seconds, the next ball passes through each channel forming section 334 before two balls pass through each channel forming section 334 to 336. - 336 can be regulated.

In the case of jackpot B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In addition, in the case of jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot B1, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot B2, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12. pass through.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. This may reduce the visibility of the ball downstream. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the case of jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the first The opening/closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

In this control example, since the opening/closing plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the next ball It may also occur that the ball enters the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, in the third operation pattern, the visibility of the balls arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher than that of the balls arranged on the upstream side. It is easy to cause a situation where it deteriorates.

In the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Furthermore, in the case of jackpot C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 normally It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

In this way, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state. Since the time required to reach the ball is controlled from the structure, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball jamming.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two balls placed in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two balls placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of the ball on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the third operation pattern, there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the round game R, so compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the balls tends to become chaotic. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed quickly. In other words, the round end condition (elapse of the round playing time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls) of a specified number of pachinko balls. It is easy to meet the winning requirement early, and it is possible to avoid prolonging the jackpot game.

In particular, for the special symbol 2 jackpot, there is a 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while daringly allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, it is possible to realize the progress of the jackpot game in a short time by giving priority to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in jackpot games.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round round game R ends, the timer means uses an electromagnetic solenoid to keep the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. 165c, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open the opening/closing plate 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. After the second round, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is ejected (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, similarly to the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced between a closed state and an open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game is controlled and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, a case has been described in which the short opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or it may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to the present control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b, and each flow is The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 disposed downstream of the path configuration parts 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration part 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball by the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the downstream side of the third flow path forming section 336 can be motivated to devise the manner in which the ball is launched.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of balls being placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time. By intentionally widening the firing interval of the balls (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the 1st operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning a prize opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R, there is a slight interval (for example, 1.0 seconds), and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. Also good. In this case, a situation is avoided in which the ball is placed in the third flow path forming part 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing when 0.8 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is ejected is set aside, the period until the prescribed number of balls enters the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode that widens the pitch interval between balls and the firing mode that increases the period until the ball is launched is maintained when the ball enters on the left side, and the ball is maintained in any firing mode when the ball enters on the right side. Even if you play the game by firing, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, at least the first ball is fired to the right side, and some (for example, the second) ball is fired as a firing mode in which the ball aimed at the specific winning hole 65a is shot to the left and right. All you have to do is shoot the ball to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, the focus is not on the balls flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but on the balls flowing down the left flow path, thereby avoiding the line of sight being obstructed by other balls. At the same time, it is possible to visually check whether the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly being fired toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid prolonging the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to avoid prolongation of the round game R.

Note that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to ensure that only one ball enters the left channel. In particular, it is only necessary to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left channel components 334 to 336 to one during approximately 0.9 seconds until the number of balls passing through the left channel, and for other periods. In this case, it is sufficient to hit the ball separately so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning hole 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, due to the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of nails (see FIG. 2), the ball enters the path through a small number of paths. Even in the case where the balls heading towards the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the right and left outside of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In FIG. 2, the nails are arranged asymmetrically, but the nails may be arranged symmetrically.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a back case 510, a first operating unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the back case 510, and a second operating unit 700 disposed on the inner lower part of the back case 510. and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper part of the back case 510. In addition, on the inside left side of the rear case 510, there is a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED, and a substrate is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light diffusion process applied to the entire surface. A diffuser decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is located to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is located above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall part 511 of the case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 28, each of the operating units 600 to 800 is shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operating unit 600 of each of the operating units 600 to 800 has changed from a production standby state to an extended state, FIG. 30 shows a state in which the second operating unit 700 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In addition, in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the front facing surface of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated with imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member, , the view is easily obstructed by the nails provided on the base plate 60, the various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, when the operating units 600 to 800 are disposed outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front tends to decrease.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, its role is the same. Furthermore, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape projecting downward on the near side of the third operation unit 800, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86; A circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed to protrude from the inner frame side of 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball riding on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from left to right.

In FIGS. 31 and 32, a state in which the third operating unit 800 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the third operating unit 800 is individually combined, and in FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800 A combined state is illustrated.

The displacement that switches between the state in FIG. 31 and the state in FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed while the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state, it will cause damage to the surrounding decorative members. Since the decoration members 870 and 880 may collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which it is displaced downward from the performance standby state to a sufficient degree to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative members On the premise that displacements of 870 and 880 are allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details will be explained later.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the extended state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, which is slightly displaced downward from the extended state, are illustrated, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit 35 shows a state in which the third operating unit 800 has been shifted to the production standby state and the first operating unit 600 has been displaced to the extended state from the state shown in FIG. 33. Illustrated.

As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third movement unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first movement unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second movement unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state while the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the performance standby state to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in the production standby state, By changing the arrangement of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state to an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operating unit 700 can be placed in front of the other operating units 600, 800. Visual overlap can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and back positions can be allowed).

In particular, the second operating unit 700 can be seen in a state where it is visible in an extended state closer to the opening 511a, and when it is visible in a state where it is slightly retracted from the opening 511a but close to the third operating unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as a presentation device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 performs a displacement operation on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-like member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It includes a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

In the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first performance surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the front surface is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L with reference to the arrow F-B), the third The first point of view from the perspective of a player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86 can see the second decorative rotating member 660. Face directly. In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the second presentation surface 661b facing straight ahead, the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotation member 660 is improved. can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player according to the arrangement, and also to change the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player. For the purpose of improving the posture, the posture can be changed depending on the arrangement.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight will be in the front and back direction, making it easier for the player to face the player directly, so visibility can be improved if the performance surface faces forward (in the direction of arrow F). Since the player's line of sight is more likely to be oblique as the player is placed closer to the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by slanting the performance surface to face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is also displaced. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and when the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 34), the back case 510 is By being placed in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is formed on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 from front to back when viewed from the front. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front side of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives the player an illusion as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 has been expanded.

To be more specific, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member The left edge of the first production surface 661a of 660 and the right edge RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized generally coincide.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the extended decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front side of the plate of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it appears as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the area right end RE1. The player can visually recognize the image as if it had been enlarged beyond that point. This makes it possible to realize a surprising performance.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying a polka dot pattern on the third symbol display device 81 and making the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b a similar polka dot pattern; A certain number is written on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative part 652b in the same font as the number variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number for notifying the success or failure of the lottery). An example of how to do this is illustrated below.

As an example of associating the above-described display and decoration, for example, six colors out of seven colors making up the rainbow are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b remains. An example in which a wooden stick is displayed in one color, or a wooden stick arranged with its right end aligned with the right end RE1 of the area on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operation unit 600 is decorated in such a manner that the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is reminiscent of ignition.

Note that the presentation mode of the overhanging decoration section 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decoration section 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, so It is possible to avoid restrictions on the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when expanding the display area.

Moreover, the object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. , the decoration of the overhanging decorative part 652b and the decoration formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870, the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering part 875, the second covering part 875). (decoration of the installation part 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured with a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is connected to the second decorative rotating member 660. By performing a relative displacement based on the reference value, the configuration is such that the player can see different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the back case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixing means 610.

The fixing means 610 fixes the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 disposed opposite to the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 and the base member 611 disposed on the front side of the base member 611. A front lid member 612 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement part 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement part 613, and a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that includes a mixture of straight parts and curved parts, and its details and operation will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle part of the main body part 621 as a long hole extending in the linear direction; A circular through hole 624 that is bored as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is brought into contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is brought into contact with the protruding piece of the front cover member 612. The structure is such that a biasing force is generated in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

In addition, in the shaft support of the cylindrical part 622, with the support fastening part 615 inserted into the cylindrical part 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female threaded part formed at the tip of the support fastening part 615. Ru. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission elongated hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be explained later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 that is fixed to a drive shaft that protrudes to the back side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

In addition, with the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into the female threaded part formed at the tip of the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

An arcuate hole 613d is formed in the front cover member 612, and extends through the cylindrical portion 613c along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes into a cylindrical shape is inserted through the cylindrical portion 634a.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member that includes a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and a plate-like extension extending in the outer radial direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. A mounting portion 634b is provided.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arcuate hole 613d, and into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the widths of the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading changes in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes an elongated main body part 641, a cylindrical part 642 that projects from the back side of the main body part 641 and has a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and A cylindrical portion 643 protruding parallel to the cylindrical portion 642; and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be able to mesh with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 643. , a bottomed cylindrical part 645 formed in a large diameter cylindrical shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed cylindrical part 645 is arranged. and an extended support portion 646 extending toward the front side at the portion.

With the above-described configuration, driving force can be transmitted between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

Note that with the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom portion. It has an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so as to have the following shape, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and through which the cylindrical support part 651a can be inserted. Note that the details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and the details will be described later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms orthogonal rotation axes, a front rotating member 652 that is pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical part 645, and a front rotating member 652 An illumination board 653 is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and has a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side, and a rear rotating member 654 is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side. A wire receiving member 655 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space for wiring, and a fastening screw is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side. It includes a front decorative part 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is externally fitted and supported by the cylindrical part formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a diametrical position at the tip thereof. A cutout portion 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, in order from the base end, a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid. It is inserted into the guide hole 616 of the member 612, and is fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped lid part C2 into the female threaded part 651b at the tip thereof.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be movable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid part C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of its circumferential part, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is arranged to face the notch part 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electrical wiring. form.

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Other wiring is formed in the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side facing the main body member 651 on the vertically opposite side of the half-cylindrical portion 655a). through the gap) and guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end thereof, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed to mesh with each other. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the decorative overhang 652b, and the light from the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 653 lights up or blinks the decorative overhang 652b. It is considered possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical part 651d of the main body member 651 and the half-cylindrical part 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. Gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a are provided.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of their operation will be described later. In addition, the gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an illuminated board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and a wiring retaining plate 663 that is fastened and fixed to the tip ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661 (described later) rotates, the illumination board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing through the space may be twisted or disorganized, the function of the wiring retaining board 663, which has through holes for temporarily fixing the wiring, prevents the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized. The aim is to avoid being placed in

Note that in this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it may place an excessive burden on electrical wiring or It is possible to avoid the situation where the wiring gets twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (a rotation axis formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. Ru.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from coming off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illumination board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illumination board 662, the first presentation surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the front side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction. It will be done.

In this way, the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is located on the back side (the second performance surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated when the second effect surface 661b is placed on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED emits light, the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where LEDs are arranged behind the illumination board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so that the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third performance surface 661c. can also be illuminated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated board 671 on which decorative characters and figures are formed from a light-transmissive resin material so that they can be seen by the player, and which irradiates light diagonally forward to the left from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always diagonally to the right. That is, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the player's eyes are likely to be placed.

The lower edge and the right edge of the decorative fixing member 670 are raised toward the back side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge, the left edge, and the front lid member 612. This front-back gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

FIG. 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, and FIG. 42 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600. FIG. Note that to facilitate understanding of the shape, the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws are not shown.

In the production standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding into the transmission elongated hole 623. That is, at the start of displacement, inertial assistance is not obtained compared to mid-displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large. However, as in this embodiment, the displacement resistance is reduced. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the load placed on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting displacement.

Further, the same is configured to hold true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions (acting standby state position, extended state position) of the rotating member 620 is the same as that of the transmission elongated hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rearward angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are in mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted perpendicularly to the axis of rotation. The signal is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is This is the same rotation angle that occurs between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the performance standby state will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. It should be noted that illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted to facilitate understanding of the shape.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the production standby state and the intermediate production state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate production state and the extended production state. is set to .

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third presentation surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end, and a curved line (approximately arcuate shape) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. A curved portion 616b formed in the curved portion 616b.

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operating unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the production standby state and the intermediate production state is a linear displacement along the linear part 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate production state and the extended production state is a linear displacement along the curved part 616a. 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is disposed at the proximal end of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the rotating member 620 and the guide slot 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 This is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 to be along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right. has been done.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616, displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that is displaced inside the guide elongated hole 616 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effects of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620, and FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b) are FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the support member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values of the numerical values are illustrated as a downward displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount, and in FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is The rotating member 620 in the extended position is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. There is.

The guide slot 616 functions as a slot that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide slot 616 is the displacement caused by the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 being displaced as the rotating member 620 rotates. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the active side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be explained. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is caused by the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the main moving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. This occurs as a result of adding up the accompanying vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left and right direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged at 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). range). That is, there are two conditions for reducing the displacement in the vertical direction.

Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is such that a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement tends to occur.

Next, details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be explained. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be explained. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly due to its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operation unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (midway position of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a curved part 616b is combined below the straight part 616a. Thereby, when the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b, it is possible to increase the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling forcefully beyond the arrangement in the intermediate presentation state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the active side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction.

As a result, the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept in a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement manner as if it were being rotated around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be caused by utilizing the run-up by rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of displacement. The load required for displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts operating can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. The rotating direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main moving part is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). Thereby, as described above, the direction of attitude change of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being reversed).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the impression to the player that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning motion), and the second decorative rotating member 660 The displacement mode can be a forceful displacement mode.

Further, even under a situation where the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The effect caused by the curved portion 616b will be explained. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, as described above, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed of only a straight portion, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate presentation state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by deliberately adopting the curved portion 616b, it is intended to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The same is true for downward displacement.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the main driving side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, a direction ( The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided for displacement (leftward).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement on the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that the supported member A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

This can prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when vertically displacing the driven side of the supported member 640 from a specific initial position to a terminal position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities will be equal. If the displacement is slow at the beginning, the displacement speed increases at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction, which is shown for comparison in FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. and reaches its maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the lower end of displacement, the vertical displacement amount of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is The quantity UE1 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, and when performing an effect to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement, the first movement unit 600 This will have a negative impact on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by employing the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is set to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

In this case, the term "uniformity" does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes suppressing the magnitude of the speed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the rotating member 620 is tilted, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start side of entering the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven member 640 gradually increases as the rotation member 620 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised). At the start of driving in the case of (operation), the amount of displacement that lifts the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced, so the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined in accordance with the magnitude of the angle θ.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear teeth 652a and the gear of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, a change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44); The angle from this state to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the first production surface 661a tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third production surface 661c to the right by 45 degrees), so that the change in angle θ Accordingly, each time the state is switched from the intermediate presentation state to the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third presentation surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The presentation surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide elongated hole 616 for regulating the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660 depending on the angle θ.

As a result, even if only a sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the detection of the second decorative rotating member 660 is performed based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The placement and orientation may be determined by the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extension part 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is activated from that state. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle.

Here, the amount of change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to calculate numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Moreover, thereby, even if the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

The change in the angle θ is approximately the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the production standby state to the intermediate production state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate production state to the extended state is generally larger. It is large (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate presentation state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the presentation standby state to the intermediate presentation state. The angle change is below the level of the previous state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by being configured so that the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 changes in size, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes in size. It can be configured as follows. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easy to maintain that posture, while in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotating member 660 The rotation angle of the member 660 can be easily increased, and the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be controlled to be slow or slow. As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the position is changed at the center of the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement about the rotation axis is performed simultaneously.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement about the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight part 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved part 616b. It becomes noticeably larger when it enters.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate presentation state is reached, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is slightly moved up and down (bounces back) from the driven side arrangement of the supported member 640 in the intermediate presentation state. Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the third presentation surface 661c to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate presentation state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the posture change in the rotation direction increases. It is conspicuously visible. That is, the player can visually perceive that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously being rotated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the decorative fixing member 670. In view of integral visual recognition (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from springing back upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the rotating member 620 is It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the supported member 640 is disposed at the lower end of displacement, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 serving as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unstable due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620. Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back (in the upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620. is configured to suitably impede displacement of the . That is, in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the direction inclining toward the upper left is the short side direction, and displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from rebounding.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the active side of the supported member 640, and the case where the active side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement The displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 in is different from that in FIG.

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 will be displaced to the lower left along the displacement direction of the main moving side (rotation direction of the rotating member 620), but in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole By being guided by the guide hole 616, it is swung slightly in the left and right direction along the guide slot 616 and is displaced downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the short direction of the guide slot 616. Thereby, displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly applied to the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration disposed on the supported member 640. It is used to upwardly displace the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the more the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, when the rotational member 620 starts rotational displacement from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotational member 660. The design is such that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture ( It is placed in a position facing vertically).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertia force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The load can be generated in such a manner that the moving member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand the load with a small local elastic displacement by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotational axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in front view, it is possible to more easily avoid a situation where the rotating member 620 is broken or damaged. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 is configured to withstand a load that cannot be borne by the rotating member 620 by elastically deforming. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the above-mentioned angle θ. Therefore, even if the change in the arrangement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from the production standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes. .

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the overhanging state is approximately 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates at approximately 45 degrees. Here, if the overhanging decorative part 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the production standby state, it will feel like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a manner of rotating clockwise, the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, by configuring the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be movable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a part that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the supported member 640 is changed from the extended state to the effect standby state. , the overhanging decorative portion 652b overhangs to the upper left side of the supported member 640, colliding with other movement units 800, or partially hiding the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. This may have a negative impact on the performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the active side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driven side of the supported member 640. When 640 extends toward the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third symbol display device 81 toward the retreating side, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be placed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's perspective can be determined from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the attitude change angle of the supported member 640.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the attitude of the supported member 640 are The difference between the change and the rotation angle is determined as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, it appears to the player that the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means different from the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 can be such that, from the player's perspective, there is a section in which it is a sliding movement, and there is a section in which it is a rotational movement. The displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's perspective, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640. It is influenced by the side that is dominant.

Therefore, in a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, it can be visually recognized that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is being rotated, and in a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is It can be visually recognized that the decorative portion 652b is slidingly displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 is rotatably displaceable so as to constitute a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and the case where it is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so that the displacement occurs in the opposite direction at a position midway through the displacement range.

For example, after rotationally displacing the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, control may be performed to return to the performance standby state by reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 631. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 on the way down, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stopping position accurate.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, near the intermediate effect state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, more of the driving force is distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660, so that the amount of rotation of the rotating member 620 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if this is not done, it is possible to easily stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is a player's field of view when viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). The standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the display is evacuated below the opening 511a to ensure that The state is mainly switched between the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 35).

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the peripheral parts of the up/down reversal performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the up/down reversal performance device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 has a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the back case 510, and a space between the right front plate member 710 and the back case 510. A rotating arm member 720 arranged and rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the back case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to be able to transmit driving force to the rotating arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 configured such that the distal end of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be guided and can be moved up and down, and a left rear side that is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750 , a pair of front support members 760 that are configured as a left and right set and are fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 , and a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the back case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702 . a blindfold decorative member 768, and an elevation reversal effect device 770 configured to be able to move the elevation plate member 740 and the front support member 760 in a manner that combines elevation displacement and longitudinal displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge and forms a gap between the back case 510 and the back case 510. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 are arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) are arranged in a manner that the sensor 713 moves toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined part 714 is formed to be inclined and is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder part 774e of the lifting/lowering reversal production device 770, and a female screw part into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the back case 510 is screwed is formed. A plurality of fastened parts 718 are provided.

In the detection sensor 713, a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged at intervals such that the detection groove is arranged at a position where the detected part 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 respectively detects the position of the detected part 735 in the production standby state of the second operating unit 700, the position of the detected part 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700, and the overhang of the second operating unit 700. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and from the output result, the output is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protruding portion 511b that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and is formed into a long plate shape having a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. a support cylinder part 722 which is provided in a cylindrical shape to protrude rearward at the bent part of the main body part 721, and whose inner peripheral side shape is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion part 511b to be inserted therethrough. , a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721, and a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721; A cylindrical fastened part 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the direction of A cylindrical fastened part 725 that projects in a cylindrical shape and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side and a rear case 510 that is wrapped around the supporting cylinder part 722 in the upward direction (left side) a torsion spring SP2 that provides a biasing force in the direction of lifting the .

A step is formed on the left side of the main body portion 721 so that the arrangement is shifted toward the front side compared to the proximal side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and a support plate is placed in the gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole part 701a formed so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened part 725. A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the back case 510 toward the front side. This can prevent the rotation arm member 720 from being displaced to the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 can be stably supported. be able to.

The right side of the main body part 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming part 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the rotational direction component of the rotating arm member 720 of the load is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. , a transmission gear 733 that meshes with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 that meshes with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are respectively pivotally supported at corresponding positions by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the right front plate member 710. A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical protrusion 711a and an arcuate hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 has a detection portion 735 formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion, protruding toward the front side, and formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and a detection portion 735 extending so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protruding part 736a that protrudes cylindrical from the tip of the extending part 736 toward the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) based on the output from the detection sensor 713. is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed to be able to be inserted into the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole 723. be done.

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing this fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It includes horizontally elongated members 742 which are elongated on the left and right sides and are fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted therethrough, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the back side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the oblong member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 includes an elongated hole 743 that is formed in an elongated oval shape from side to side with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to be inserted therethrough, and an elongated hole 743 on the upper side of the elongated hole 743. A cylindrical part 744 protruding from the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide parts 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right from the cylindrical part 744 as a reference. Be prepared.

A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 becomes a rotating arm via the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by member 720 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up/down reversal performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the up/down reversal performance device 770 in a state that it can be moved back and forth. That is, the elevating and reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction to separate the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating/descending reversing effect device 770.

The guide section 745 is composed of a pair of left and right parts, and includes a long plate part 745a in the front and rear, and a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside. 745b.

The rotary cylinder part 745b rotates when the above-mentioned vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth, and functions as a part that guides the displacement in the front and back direction, but the details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750 is sloped in such a manner that the front side of the right side is tilted toward the front side as it goes upward, similar to the front upper slope part 714 of the right front plate member 710. and a plurality of fastened parts 752 formed with internally threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the back side of the back case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate to which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative part 768a. , is configured so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front support members 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 that is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761, with the back surface of the plate facing upward. A receiving inclined portion 762 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate part 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw part. This is the board part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714, 751, and by guiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the vertically reversing effect device 770 to this guide path, the vertically reversing device 770 moves in the front and rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. This vertical displacement will be explained below.

52(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 52(a) and 52(b), the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 53(a) and 53(b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is caused by the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 being transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 will be explained. In addition, in this description, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, and FIG. 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same thing also holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives rotational direction from the rotating arm member 720. By maximizing the displacement resistance, it is possible to easily stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the lifting/lowering reversing device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the lower side of the center frame 86, and is upwardly displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced toward the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is due to the configuration in which the rotary cylinder part 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751, and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the up/down reversal effect device 770. This is reduced by the configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotary cylinder parts 774e include a receiving slope part 762 and a front upper slope part 714, 751 which are arranged in symmetrical positions (the front upper slope part 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, (see), and by rolling the rotating cylinder part 774e around the cylindrical part 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751. Displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotary cylinder parts 745b that are arranged in the front and back, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged slightly upwardly, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed. The cylindrical portion 774e prevents excessive load from being applied to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotation axis position) of the presentation device 780 is designed to be located slightly forward of the longitudinal center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. biased in the direction. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c tend to be displaced such that the front side goes down and the rear side goes up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged in close proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, and is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged in close proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotating cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, since a gap is formed between the front rotary cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, stable rolling occurs between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. Since there is a gap between the rear rotary cylinder part 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b, it is possible to stably roll the rear rotary cylinder part 745b with the second horizontal plate 774c. Thereby, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-mentioned shape guidance. Therefore, the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the vertical reversal performance device 770 is displaced toward the front side, compared to the downward displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement becomes relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required for upwardly displacing the vertically reversing effect device 770.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it has a natural length in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the vertical reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 prevents the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the up/down reversal performance device 770 is arranged above the arrangement in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up/down reversal performance device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the stop timing may be slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate presentation state by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Furthermore, for example, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal when stop control is performed in the same way, the second operation unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and the downward movement due to its own weight will be due to the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, it is possible to move the second operation unit 700 toward the intermediate presentation state and maintain the arrangement.

Further, for example, when controlling the drive motor 731 from the extended state of the second operating unit 700 and controlling the drive motor 731 to stop so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 When it passes below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, so that it can be easily prevented from being displaced downward to a greater extent than in the intermediate effect state. Even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state by applying the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Here, the operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front and back direction along with the vertical movement will be explained. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it moves in and out of a frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable accessories are designed with emphasis on their appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted outside the center frame 86, they attract less attention from players. Appearance was often not considered, based on the assumption that it would not.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view when viewing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the inside of the center frame 86, , the line of sight reaches to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the gaming area), so if the movable accessory retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 looks bad, the player's It may reduce interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming a decorative surface on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the direction of displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is changed from the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. By making the direction of displacement follow a line that spreads out (sloping downward toward the rear), that is, the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, each decorative surface can be easily placed in the player's field of vision. It consists of

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be brought into the player's field of vision without any difficulty. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. The decorations (figures, patterns, characters, pictures, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper side is arranged in the front and back gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side of the center frame 86 when the second operation unit 700 is in standby state. Therefore, it is possible to switch between a state in which attention is focused on the ball flowing down the gaming area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state in which attention is focused on the display effect developed on the third symbol display device 81. When the player moves his/her line of sight, it is easy to see the player.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state is displayed on the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side.

Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the performance standby state so as to be easily recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously drawn to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Furthermore, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the content of the decorative surface that is visible to the player in the extended state differs. cases can arise.

For example, if the up/down reversal performance device 770 is placed in the performance standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (if missed or the operating speed is excessively fast), If the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the side, most of the front side of the decorative surface will be hidden by the game board 13 in the performance standby state, so the player cannot see the contents of the decorative surface displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The user is forced to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention paid to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the content of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up/down reversal performance device 770 in the performance standby state, and the player can visually recognize the decorative surface in the extended state. Through the installation member 787, the player can grasp the contents of the decorations (notification contents, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that were visible to the player.

As a result, for players who have missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the contents notified based on the state of the covering member 787 can be displayed on the decorative surface of the covering member 787 that is visible even in the performance standby state. Continuous notification is possible. Thereby, the attention of the covering member 787 can be maintained at a high level regardless of whether it is in the performance standby state, the extended state, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is such that it moves from being disposed on the back side of the rear end surface of the gaming area to moving forward beyond the rear end surface of the gaming area. The configuration as a displacement will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is placed on the covering member 787 side. A channel forming portion 86a is provided in a protruding manner.

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed so that the ball that jumps into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then the ball enters the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide channel for guiding the balls that have flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 once backward, then flowed forward again, and toward the first winning opening 64 provided in the gaming area. (See Figure 9). That is, due to the flow path forming portion 86a, the rear end surface BE1 of the gaming area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

The ball flowing down the channel forming part 86a has a high probability of entering the first prize opening 64, so the channel forming part 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to be focused on the channel forming portion 86a. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), since the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the channel forming part 86a, it is easy to create a state in which the performance device 780 enters the player's field of vision in the performance standby state. Can be done.

In the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700, the covering member 787 is arranged on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), and in the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, the covering member 787 The front part is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the front part of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-back position as the front-back position of the gaming area. Therefore, it can appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is moved up and down, the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction, and the front-back position of the front end surface thereof is in the extended state, and the second decoration in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is It is configured to match (match) the front and rear positions of the second presentation surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state. This means that they match, making it easier to visually recognize them as one.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the production device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate production state or production standby state than the arrangement in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operating unit 600 is lower than the arrangement in the extended state. 661 and the production device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The elevating and reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 that is cylindrical and protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , is integrally formed with the left and right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 by a pair of guide extension portions 774 extending from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side, and a connecting portion extending up and down. An upper elongated portion 775 is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and is arranged from both left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775 to the back side and is configured to be able to guide the linear motion plate member 784 of the production device 780 in the left-right direction. a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fastened and fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the back side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device; a lower elongated portion 772 and an upper elongated portion A light emitting producing means 778 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775.

The insertion cylindrical part 773 is a part that is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a size relationship that allows it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-back direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

The guide extension part 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width is oriented in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction is oriented in the horizontal direction, and a width larger than the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is oriented in the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side, and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d are provided, and a rotary cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so as to extend inwardly from the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanding portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, and by abutting against each other, tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward is suppressed. That is, by securing the width and length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is disposed vertically opposite to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be achieved. can be suppressed.

The cylindrical portions 774d are not arranged in pairs in the vertical direction, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is disposed shifted toward the front compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclinations of the front upper inclined parts 714 and 751 are parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical parts 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclinations of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. Thereby, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and local loads can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in such a manner that the left and right pairs are arranged vertically and have internal threads formed on the inner circumferential side, and the left and right cylindrical portions 776a. A plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b are provided.

The fall-off prevention plate portion 776b includes insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portions 776a. This is a part that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical part 776a, and functions as a part to prevent the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, but the details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a pair of insertion holes 777d are formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough, and fastened to the back side. A wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and when a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, the cylindrical protrusion 777c pivotally supports the vertically inverting member 781 so that it cannot fall off. It is a part.

A fastening screw screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d, and the fastening screw allows the transmission device holding plate 777 to be inserted into the upper elongated portion 775. It is fastened and fixed.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a part for holding and fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the transmission device holding plate 777, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can also be improved.

The light emitting device 778 includes two left and right elongated plate-shaped illumination boards 778a, upper and lower, on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-transmitting board 778a arranged on the front side of the illumination boards 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed from a plastic resin material and has a light diffusion process formed thereon.

The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of detection sensors 778d disposed on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the vertically inverting member 781 of the production device 780 by having an arcuate protrusion 781d arranged in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened parts formed on the back side, and the fastened parts are inserted from the back side into insertion holes formed in the lower elongated part 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screws are screwed in and fastened and fixed, making the fastening screws inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b has insertion holes 778c formed on both left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are inserted into the female threads of the upper elongated portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusing member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and there is a possibility that it will be noticeable without countermeasures, but in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always facing the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by arranging the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted can be increased.

The production device 780 is a device that has an outer shape disposed around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-and-down reversing member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-and-down reversing member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft, and one end at each of both longitudinal ends of the up-down reversing member 781 a pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported; a pair of translational plate members 784 that have the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported and whose displacement is guided in the left-right direction by a guide portion 776; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) about a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 is a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 jointly supported with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed in a fixed phase to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a manner that cannot be removed; Covering members 787 are disposed before and after the end plate member 785d and have a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the back side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a long length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the ulnar direction toward the back side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. An arcuate protrusion 781d is provided.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side. The vertically inverting member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down reversing member 781. That is, the up-and-down reversing member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical protrusion portion 781c that is displaced as the up-and-down reversing member 781 is rotated.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission producing means 778. That is, the arcuate protrusion 781d can be placed on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the up-and-down reversing member 781 can be determined between two postures, one in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and the other in between (the pair of detection sensors 778d (a posture in which the arcuate protrusions 781d are not arranged on both detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in the shape of a long rod (narrow plate shape), and has one side support hole 783a bored at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 781c, A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b whose inner circumferential side is formed penetratingly at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ).

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the back side is screwed into the female thread. Thereby, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the up-and-down reversing member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed into a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arcuate plate portion 784b is provided in an arc shape protruding from the center axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, and an elliptical plate portion 784b is provided in an oval shape extending parallel to the left and right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a. a pair of elongated holes 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d arranged vertically and in parallel at positions between the elongate holes 784c and protruding toward the back side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of protrusions 784e are formed as protrusions that protrude from opposing sides and extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that opens toward the back side is provided at the end of the support plate portion 784d on the inner peripheral side. A ring-shaped joint is formed between a pair of fastened parts 784f in which female threads are formed, an arrangement hole 784g formed through the cylindrical protruding part 784a and the support plate part 784d, and the shaft supporting member 786. A ring holding half part 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half part 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , is provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner circumferential diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female thread is formed on the inner circumferential side. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be detached from the cylindrical protrusion 784a. It is pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is arranged in close proximity to the other cylindrical portion 783b so as to face it in the radial direction in the assembled state, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening into which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a has a fastening hole inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b. By screwing in the screws, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In its supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slid along the direction in which the elongated hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e is for regulating the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the left-right direction. The details will be described later.

The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, and the details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged as a left and right pair and pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed from a metal material into a substantially cylindrical shape, and a length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed; an end plate member 785d disposed on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a; A ring-shaped metal member 785e is arranged around the metal rod 785a in such a manner as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female thread is formed inside the ring-shaped metal member 785e, which is a portion protruding from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing part 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding portion 784e is inserted into the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship that allows sliding with the protruding portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship that restricts displacement in the left and right direction with respect to the protruding portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the horizontal width of the protrusion portion 784e, and the diameter of the deep groove portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the length of the gap between the protrusions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows the metal rod to rotate about its axis and to suppress displacement in the left and right direction.

The bevel member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 causes the bevel tooth portion 783c to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. can be assembled into.

In the assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is placed in the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off to the front side. The displacement toward the back side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to the non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a The distal end portions are formed in an interference fit dimensional relationship, so that they are fitted and fixed.

Note that the method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be fixed using an adhesive or the like, or a female thread may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a, and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female thread. The end plate member 785d may be fastened and fixed to the metal rod 785a, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the rotation center of the end plate member 785d is can be made to easily coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the disposed metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding member of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 786b and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 is capable of holding a magnet Mg. A magnet holding half part 786c formed in a rectangular box shape is provided.

When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is inserted into the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with openings on the left and right inner sides, and are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and have different sides on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be interpreted with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface of the first main decorative surface 787a1. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side that is visible to the player, and the back surface thereof is A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed. Note that the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on a side that is visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It includes a plurality of extending portions 787c that extend toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed in a portion between the extending portions 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides. .

The extending portions 787c are formed such that their ends abut or are placed close to each other when the covering member 787 is placed close to each other (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as one unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion disposed at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emitting producing means 778 when the covering member 787 is disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26), or the upper elongated portion 775 at the upper left and right center. This is a part for visually opening the arcuate plate part, etc., and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these parts.

With the operation of the presentation device 780, the covering member 787 has two states: a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and a state in which the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52); The state can be switched between the decorative surface 787b1 facing the front side and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that changes the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-and-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an erect vertical arrangement state) of the up-and-down reversible member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(b) ) shows a state in which the up-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the erect vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in an inverted vertical arrangement state in which the up-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from an upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. Ru.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the up-down reversing member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the audio lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of presentation device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the amount of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur will be explained. These displacements do not occur at the same time and to the same extent; there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, an overview will be given. The configuration of the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down reversing member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projection 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projection 781c of the up-down reversing member 781, rotates from the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed. The pair of left and right translational plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b has been displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it is rotated approximately 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (see FIG. 55) (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends) Illustrated as

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the attitude change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, load transmission (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c is displaced upwardly. ). In addition, in FIG. 58(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are illustrated as being arranged in an overlapping manner, and this overlapping width is the same as the bevel tooth portion 783c. This is absorbed by elastic deformation between the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the up-and-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. rotate in the direction of rotation.

Note that while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is twice the angle of rotation around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to the pressure caused by the displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear tooth, and the bevel tooth member This is not enough to reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. In other words, the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation by an angle of 30 degrees) quantity).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are made of a resin material, the pressing is not performed. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the posture of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotation direction changes from the state of FIG. 57(a) to the state of FIG. 57(b). ) is maintained until the state of

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54) is caused by opposing adsorption forces.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

Furthermore, for the left-hand shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed on the front side of the end plate member 785d, similar to the right side, while the magnet Mg is placed on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See Figure 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotation member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In this embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding .

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). Then, when the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attraction force of the magnet Mg, and the relationship between the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f increases. As the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, which are released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg, are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotational direction of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the speed of the operation of the cover member 787 without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, so while reducing the burden of control design for the drive motor 782, the effect of the cover member 787 can be adjusted. The effect can be improved.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs can be delayed by the attraction force of the magnet Mg from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attraction force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is applied to the shaft rotating member. It acts effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 can be delayed by the magnetic force regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the vertical reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond the position shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above, similar effects occur. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the displacement in the left-right direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down reversing member 781 approaches the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so that the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is The amount of rotation increases. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotation operation of the up-and-down reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases first, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. As a result, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear displacement and rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connection portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 (see FIG. 55). Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be explained.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the production device 780. In FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c), the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 59(a), the effect device 780 is illustrated with the vertically inverting member 781 in an erect vertical arrangement state, and in FIG. 59(b), the effect device 780 is shown when the vertically inverting member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59(c), the production device 780 is illustrated in an inverted vertical arrangement state of the up-and-down reversing member 781.

The vertical inversion member 781 changes its state from an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

The vertical inversion member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, the reversing operation changes between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. ) The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in ).

As described above, while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the direction of rotation of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the pair of shaft rotating members 785 and the end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right rotates in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 has the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing the front side, and the left covering member 787 has the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 facing the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

As a result, during rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the left-hand covering member 787 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the right-hand covering member 787 Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being seen together.

Therefore, the contents of the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be made to be different on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information that the covering member 787 provides to the player can be reduced.

This can reduce the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Furthermore, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game can be played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. This also has the effect of making it easier to maintain the person's line of sight on the covering member 787.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 change to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first main decorative surface 787a1). When the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the production device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the visibility to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is It will be blocked by unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) and the performance device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decorative surface 787b2) becomes easier to enter the player's field of view.

In this manner, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen all together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and By preventing the side from facing the side, it does not attract attention, and is formed as a side that can attract the attention of players in the performance standby state.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed depending on the arrangement, so the presentation performance is excessively low relative to the cost of arranging the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of concealing it well). This makes it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787. It is possible to aim for

In this embodiment, the metal member that attracts the Mg magnet is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 involves linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the presentation device 780 that can perform rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, by performing rotational displacement, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member disposed on the left and right 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly disposed on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, thereby making it possible to rotationally displace the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is performed only when it is determined that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state based on the output of the detection sensor 713. Executable control is based on the premise that Thereby, rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other when the up-down reversing member 781 is vertically arranged, and in this state, are arranged opposite to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 in front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement around the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close together produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be seen as one, and is a necessary configuration for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction before rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension part 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting part between the upper elongate part 775 and the lower elongate part 772, and the extension part 787c and the upper elongate part 775 It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the lower elongated portion 772 collide with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a small value.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and rotational displacement can be made less noticeable, so each decoration Since the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed without considering their appearance during rotational displacement, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Note that the timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the presentation device 780 remains the same, but the magnet Mg By changing the magnet to a magnet with a large attraction force, it is possible to avoid the collision between the above-mentioned connecting portion and the extending portion 787c, as in the present embodiment.

As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from lowering the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The insertion holes 778c are arranged asymmetrically to match the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted, it is no longer possible to arrange an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screws are made of metal and do not transmit light, they are easily visible in the dark during light-emitting effects.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c avoiding areas that are made to shine brightly to make them stand out, and as a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is made asymmetrical.

Note that it is naturally permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c laterally symmetrically. In particular, when the decorations on the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are the same, there is no disadvantage caused by symmetrically arranging the insertion holes 778c, and the illumination board 778a can be easily designed.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusing member 778b is replaced by the extending portion 787c. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and other mechanical parts are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is The shape is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right elongated parts of the upper elongated part 775 disposed in the upper elongated part 775. Further, the vertical reversing member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disc portion of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the presentation effect of the appearance of the presentation device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 26. The third operation unit 800 is disposed above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the performance standby state, and is supported by the tips of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the back case 510. This unit is configured to be able to move up and down as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portions that make up the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside are not illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801, and a fixed cylinder to which a cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical part 821 with the cylindrical part 821 inserted into the inner periphery, and a main body part 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery. A rotatably supported outer rotating member 840, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 (five in this embodiment) rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 accommodated in the held member 810. and a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disc-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing part 812 which is recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical part 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw for fixing is inserted and a through hole through which an electric wiring is inserted. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side that can receive the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840; and a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 protrude from the front side as cylindrical parts that pivotally support the transmission gear 863 in a non-removable manner, and a double cylindrical part that pivotally supports the load response gear 865 in a non-removable manner on the front side. A plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 bored in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting device such as an LED that is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and has a light emitting device such as an LED on the front side. A disk-shaped illumination board 823 and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting plate made of a light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illumination board 823 from the front side. It includes a decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical part 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fixing the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical part 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and through this penetrating part, the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 is routed to the front side and arranged behind the illumination board 823. Connected to the connector.

The illumination board 823 has an inner light emitting part 823a arranged as an LED at the vertices of a pentagon and a central position equidistant from these vertices, and an outer light emitting part 823b arranged at 15 places at equal intervals on the circumference. and. The inner light emitting section 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting section 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diametrically).

The outer light emitting section 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b is irradiated onto the plating parts 871a of the first decorative members 870 that are arranged closely to each other at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 will be irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light emitting part 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting part 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since they are arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number (in this embodiment, three) of LEDs is always directed to each first decorative member 870 regardless of the rotational orientation of the first decorative member 870. can be irradiated.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the amount of light LD1 irradiated onto the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, and an outer diameter side portion configured to be slidable on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. is formed.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion that projects rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 therebetween, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 is prevented. In addition, since the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength, when sliding, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotary member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load that occurs during sliding failure (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 includes a cylindrical main body part 831 having a circular flange-like part 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at a position where the circumference of the main body part 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 are fastened and fixed to the circular flange-like portion 831a in a parallel position, and a plurality of metal rods 832 are formed so that they can be inserted therethrough and are configured to be guided by the metal rods 832 so that they can be linearly displaced. A linear motion member 833 and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer side of the translation member 833.

The main body portion 831 includes the above-mentioned circular flange-like portion 831a and a plurality of sliding protrusions that extend rearward in a protrusion shape with the circular flange-like portion 831a as a base end at angular positions (5 locations) between adjacent metal rods 832. A plurality of recessed portions 831c are provided at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and is designed to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed to have a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, the sliding protrusion 831b is placed at the angular position on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the outer rotating member 840, on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported, is loaded so as to be displaced radially outwardly. Even if the outer rotary member 840 is subjected to a movement, the sliding projection 831b can receive the displacement of the outer rotary member 840, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotary member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotary member 830 is can be maintained at a low level.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted, and by disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, mutual relative rotation is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The translational member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b arranged at intervals in the translational displacement direction and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a cylindrical shaft portion 833c extending along the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c. A recessed groove 833d is provided.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and allows the overhanging parts 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 to slide. By being fitted externally, the groove functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude in a cylindrical shape parallel to the translational direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over ¾ of the circumference (approximately 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and the decorative members 870, 880 can be attached by screwing the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841 and a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extending outward in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the main body 841 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. The extended arm portion 842 of the main body portion 841, the gear teeth 843 formed on the outer circumferential side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 are arranged such that they can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detected portion 844 extending outward is provided.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the side rod portion 851 and inserting a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are disposed so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member, and includes a proximal rod portion 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the other portions of the proximal rod portion 851. A thickened part 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end rod part 853 which extends from the front end of the thickened part 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the proximal rod part 851. , and a rotation transmitting part 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod part 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship that allows them to rotate with each other when the cylindrical protrusion 833a is inserted therethrough. A guide hole 854b, which is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a, through which the cylindrical protrusion 833b is inserted and guided, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. A bevel tooth portion 854c is formed in a shape and forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding part 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive gear 862 that is non-removably supported by the cylindrical protrusion 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 are meshed with each other so that driving force can be transmitted through gears 862, a central annular gear 864 is meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a plurality of transmission gears 864 are provided on the front side of the arrangement of the central annular gears 864. A pair of load response gears 865 are arranged offset and pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and a pair of load response gears 865 are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gears 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865 is provided.

The central annular gear 864 is formed into an annular shape, and is designed to allow the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 to be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and has a recess so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protrudes from the bottom plate toward the front side with an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation part 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed part 831c, the rear end of the main body part 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is placed in the gap between the support annular parts 864b in a dimensional relationship such that it is an intermediate fit. Or they are fitted with an interference fit dimension. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

Note that the arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equally spaced, the assembly can be done quickly by matching the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed part 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864. It becomes possible to do so. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at 72 degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Since it is thought that the influence of displacement during assembly is small, it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the spacing is uneven, the number of man-hours required to align the central ring gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 before assembling increases by one during the assembly process, but Using this arrangement, the postures of the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned.

The load response gear 865 is arranged to be able to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is 865 is configured to be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is regulated (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits driving force in one direction is configured as a set with the transmission direction being reversed, and the switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 62 and 63, a decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and illustration of a portion for configuring displacement is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the above-described inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is fixed to one of the cylindrical protruding portions 834b. It includes a first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton part 871 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a first covering part 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton part 871. , is provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered part 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmissive resin material, and the surface thereof has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on it. When the front side faces the front side, the pattern etc. can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covered portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like drawn thereon. Therefore, by changing the first covered part 875 that emits strong light through light emission control by the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered part 875, the patterns that attract the attention of players can be made different. can be set.

For example, at the same time when the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that draws attention to which first covered portion 875 is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 side from the player's perspective, the inner rotating member 830 If it is controlled to rotate, the first covering part 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed as the rotation stops, so that the player can The line of sight can be focused on the first covered portion 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton part 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a second covering part 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton part 881. , is provided.

The second skeleton part 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering part 885 so that it cannot fall off.

The second covered part 885 has a metal screw screwed and fixed at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the adjacent second covered part 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, it is possible to ensure the integrity of the second covered portion 885 in the combined state (particularly in the continuous combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covered part 885 has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the designs, etc. make it visible to the person.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the plurality (in this embodiment, five) of the second covering parts 885 are grouped by the plurality of (at least two, maximum of five) second covering parts 885. The pattern etc. is configured so that when the five second covering parts 885 form a combined state, each second covering part 885 is shaped like a circle so that it is visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front. It is decorated so that it forms part of the body.

Although the pattern etc. drawn on the second covering part 885 is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering part 885 in the serially combined state is the direction of rotation of the second decorative member 880. The design is such that there is no big difference even if the arrangement of the two is different. That is, the design does not have clear vertical and horizontal directions as a pattern, but has a design in which the outer shape does not change noticeably even when rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, the more firmly the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be integrated, the better the production performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covered part 885 side is firmly integrated by the adsorption force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that when the second covered part 885 is disposed on the front side, the combined state It is possible to improve the presentation performance in this situation.

In addition, in each second covering part 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed from front to back by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are simply replaced with metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacently provided on the opposite side, and the five second covering portions 885 are Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covered portion 875 does not accommodate a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covered portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this is intended to avoid deterioration in presentation performance.

In other words, since each of the first covered parts 875 has an independent picture drawn on it, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, the game There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the pattern etc. that is visible to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid deterioration in performance of the performance using the picture drawn on the first covering part 875.

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covered part 875 side is weak, vibrations that occur due to vertical displacement (stopping from) and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. ), the arrangement of the combined first covered portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be achieved with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. It is possible to improve the effect of the production by the covering part 875.

Due to the above-mentioned circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. The state in which it faces is also referred to as the serially combined state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state will be described.

64(a), FIG. 64(b), FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 66(a), FIG. ), FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced as the inner rotating member 830 rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840. are illustrated in chronological order.

That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in rear view and front view, and it illustrates how the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual combined state (FIG. 64(a), FIG. 66(a)). .

Note that in FIGS. 64 to 67 , the axis of the metal rod 832 is shown as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. Note that the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotational operation is also referred to as a "switching rotational operation" hereinafter), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotation member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotation member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the translational member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmission section 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830, and is also displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation supported by the rotation transmission section 854 Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position, and the arrangement is not fixed in the circumferential direction. Since the displacement can be maintained, the production effect during the switching rotation operation can be improved compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear displacement in the radial direction (for example, the above-mentioned reversal operation by the second operation unit 700). can be maintained high.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a rotational movement with high acceleration is generated using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the translational direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the impression that it is fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and a period ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high production effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is likely that a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotational axis of the outer rotating member 840 may become misaligned. In the embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the axis of rotation, so that each load cancels out the other. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840, thereby making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) in the rotational operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collision with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to determine the posture of the lifting arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

Furthermore, as the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced as described above, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. Displaced and at the same time displaced in the circumferential direction.

As the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to member 834 are rotated about metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. Further, the rotation direction increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the virtual position line 832F in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and since the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ) is set in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integral rotation state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in this embodiment, 180 When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (in this embodiment, 90 degrees) due to the rotation of ).

That is, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is twice the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. It does not cause any effect that slows down the rotation.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap may be created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the suction force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 is lost. No delaying effects occur.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be made smaller.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and finished early, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The promptness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 to be non-constant with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830.

For example, in the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can rotate integrally is 45 degrees. In this case, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and when the virtual position line 832F is further rotated by an angle of 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which integral rotation is possible than during rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 will be used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, the intermediate arm member 850, and the decorative members 870 and 880, but due to the above-mentioned configuration, the integral rotation operation is not possible. Since it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating from the possible state, the load on the drive motor 861 is not excessive when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating. You can avoid it from getting too big.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting the position in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connection surfaces between the first covered portion 875 and the second covered portion 885) are visible, and the decorative members 870, 880 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side part of the

During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extending arm portion 842 that is adjacent to the extending arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a that is rotatably supported is disposed. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Furthermore, by arranging the proximal rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be controlled. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and a collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, thereby receiving resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (clockwise direction in front view in the individual combined state), or in a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (in the front view counterclockwise direction in the individual combined state), If the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted (for example, from the individual combined state to the serial combined state) due to rotation in the same direction, the outer A load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued to be restricted in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotational operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotational motion").

The integral rotational movement occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, the integral rotational movement occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are disposed close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diametrically expanding direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the third operation unit 800 is on standby. An integral rotation operation can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executable and controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) allows the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to perform the switching rotation operation accompanied by the displacement in the radial direction, and the expanding operation. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without radial displacement, and any operation can be performed in both driving directions, but there is a priority order of operation. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any operation in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation continues as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. It is possible to perform a rotation operation, and it is possible to perform an integral rotation operation by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, but immediately, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in a front view. cannot be executed.

For example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted, If the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation will be executed again, and it will not be possible to immediately perform the integrated rotation operation clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

In this way, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed with respect to the rotational direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed for each rotational direction of the drive motor 861. Based on the determination result, it is possible to drive the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal performance and the reverse performance as the performance control of the third operation unit 800.

During a reversal presentation, an operation including a switching rotational operation is executed, and during a normal presentation, an operation not including a switching rotational operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage, or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after setting the third operating unit 800 to the extended state. After the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed to perform normal performance control. As a result, even if the state of the movable part cannot be determined from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 accidentally collide with surrounding decorative members. .

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, drive control during normal performance before reaching the reversal performance will be explained. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally.

Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being moved up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the up and down movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together. The elevating and lowering arm member 801 may be moved up and down while the integral rotation operation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and this switching of the output can be determined. The audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotary member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of driving time from this initial position, the outer rotary member 840 can be arbitrarily set. It can be controlled to stop in this position.

Next, drive control during reversal performance will be explained. First, during the reversal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the normal direction until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. Due to the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

If the driving motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, a series of combined states will be reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 will rotate together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is performed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reverse performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is moved downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in reverse until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in normal rotation. The forward rotation drive causes the third operation unit 800 to perform a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has started, the process returns to the normal production mode. The restrictions on the drive control during this normal performance are similar to the restrictions on the drive control explained during the normal performance that was arranged before the above-mentioned reverse performance.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for standard judgment. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced compared to the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation continues or from the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, irrespective of the attitude of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the serial combined state.

Therefore, in the case of controlling to switch to the series combination state at the timing of the jackpot announcement in the motion performance, it is possible to avoid the player guessing whether or not there will be a jackpot announcement based on the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations in the series of combinations are designed so that the contents perceived by the player do not differ greatly depending on the rotational direction arrangement of the second decoration member 880. That is, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotational direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents that the player perceives as a series of combined states at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the series combination state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, it is possible to omit the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the series combination state, so the first decorative member in the individual combination state Regardless of the attitude of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

In this manner, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 extends from the rear end where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end where the illumination board 823 is arranged. Electric wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and terminals are connected to connectors provided on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, so that the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting part 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging part 824a which bulges out to the front side in the central part side of the transparent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player in the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated into the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 are illuminated. It works to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) where the decorative member 870 is placed on the front side and a series combined state (see FIG. 32) where the decorative member 880 is placed on the front side. Therefore, the light LD1 can be used to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated part 871a of the first skeleton part 871. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated toward the first covering part 875, and the brightness of the first covering part 875 when the light LD1 is irradiated can be favorably increased.

Here, in this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it, so that the illumination direction of the light LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are different. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by rotating the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering part 875 caused by the light LD1 will easily change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 will be rotated integrally while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to carry out the effect that the user wants.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to be able to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination board 823. and is designed so that its center is located near the center of the first covered portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that its optical axis is directed in the direction of the outer diameter of the circle in which the outer light emitting part 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating part 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the light LD1 is It advances toward the side, and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with respect to the outer light emitting part 823b. As a result, light can be stably irradiated near the center of the front plate part of the first covered part 875, so that the first covered part 875 can be seen with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

Furthermore, the first skeleton part 871 is a part to which a plating process is performed in the same way as the plating process to the plating part 871a, and has an outer plating part 871b disposed outside the first covering part 875 when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b as well as the plating part 871a, but since the outer plating part 871b is arranged at the rear compared to the arrangement of the plating part 871a, the light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b. The degree of illumination can be weakened.

This avoids a situation where the intensity of the light visible outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875. be able to.

The illumination board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so all of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b is directed inside. It is not intended to be irradiated.

First, in FIG. 69, the internal structure is visible between the member edge 875a of the first covering part 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering part 885, which is arranged opposite to the member edge 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain size is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outward from the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Moreover, there is a gap between the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885, which are arranged to face the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed which exceeds the area required to avoid this.

Firstly, the gap VA2 is designed to ensure a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and to prevent the metal rod 832 from colliding with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 833. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

Second, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton parts 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical protruding part 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby attaching the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Furthermore, thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to proceed. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through equally spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visible as a light.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated in the same way. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b (for example, keeping all lights on), and the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the integrated state (see FIG. 32), the second skeleton part 881 is entirely formed of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the reflection effect of the second skeleton part 881 on the light LD1.

As a result, the light that is irradiated within the frame of the second covering part 885 can be the light (weak light) that is far from the optical axis of the light LD1, so that the second covering part 885 can be illuminated. It is possible to weaken the degree of On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially exiting from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

The frame of the second covered part 885 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) light-transmissive resin material, and a light diffusion process is formed on the inside. A light-diffusing decorative portion 885c is disposed circumferentially. Therefore, out of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusing decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusing decorative portion 885c to emit light from a surface.

This surface emitting makes it possible to make the light visible through the light-diffusing decorative portions 885c disposed in the circumferential direction uniform, and each of the light-diffusing decorative portions of the five second decorative members 880 885c can be visually recognized as an integral part by the player.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the performance performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. This integration can be achieved by visually recognizing that the light diffusing decorative portions 885c are continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance performance in the combined state when the second covered portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

The member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885 is formed in a concave shape to face the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (in contact with) the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 is , protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see FIG. 32), the first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed on the back side is visible to the player. It is possible to reduce the degree of interference, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covered portion 875 from entering the field of vision.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is placed in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both extended (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to view the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is easily recognized, which tends to reduce the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the serially combined state, the end surface 885b1 of the second covered portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation can be performed when viewed from an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be seen as a part of the second covering part 885, and the extent to which the first covering part 875 is visible can be reduced. Thereby, in the serially combined state, the second covered part 885 can be made more visible than the first covered part 875, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotary member 830, so that the inner rotary member 830 rotates, while the outer rotary member 840 acts as a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the sliding protrusion 831b is intended to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will increase, and the torque limiter 866 Therefore, the allowable value for load transmission must be increased, which tends to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. To this end, this embodiment has the following features. For example, the only supporting points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 during rotation are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , and other parts are configured to leave gaps. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the structure can be configured to easily reduce displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress displacement toward the front with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, although the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction that pushes it forward, the sliding member 825 has a plate front surface that contacts the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and back. come into contact with

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter. The protrusion portion 822b that protrudes from the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the protruding portion 822b contacts the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the entire back surface of the short diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can be done. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

Note that since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected to occur when the weight of the fastening screws increases is reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be explained. In explaining this fixing, reference will be made to FIGS. 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton part 871 into a female screw of the fastened part 876 formed at the rear part of the frame of the first covering part 875. After the first covering part 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton part 871 by screwing into the frame part 871, the overhanging part 873 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the first skeleton part 871 is screwed into the first covering part 875. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting outward) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton part 881 into a female screw of the fastened part 886 formed at the rear part of the frame of the second covering part 885. After the second covering part 885 is fastened and fixed to the second frame part 881 by screwing into the second frame part 881, the overhanging part 883 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the second frame part 881 is screwed into the second covering part 885. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting it outside) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and as the rotating member 834 is linearly displaced or rotated, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member Member 880 can be configured for linear or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging parts 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the translational member 833, thereby changing the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the translational member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832). ) is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton parts 871 and 881 from falling off from the translational member 833.

Since the skeleton parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotation The member 834 can be prevented from falling off from the translational member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotating member 834 is assembled to the translational member 833, the portions that define the arrangement of the rotational member 834 on the translational member 833 are fixed to the skeleton parts 871, 881 to which the rotational member 834 is fixed. Therefore, the number of steps for assembly and disassembly can be reduced, unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the translational member 833 is formed on the rotational member 834 itself.

That is, for example, during disassembly, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the skeleton parts 871, 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. Instead, the regulation of the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linearly moving member 833 can also be canceled. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each of the operation units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) show an operation unit 500 schematically chronologically explaining examples of combined operations of each operation unit 600 to 800. FIG. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering part 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decorations are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by letters or the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a has the word "Normal" written vertically, the second effect surface 661b has the word "activation" written horizontally, and the third effect surface 661c has the word "activation" written horizontally. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the words "Start of War," the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the words "A pinch is an opportunity," and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the words "Attack." The characters "Patience!?" are shown on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2, respectively.

Furthermore, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering part 875, and five "○" numbers are shown in the second covering part 885. ” symbol is shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is placed in a performance standby state (see FIG. 28). Note that above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

Further, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate effect state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate effect state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, the first covered portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after stopping, the third effect surface 661c is extended inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are It can make your movements lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the performance so that the expectation level of jackpot in the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700 can be visually recognized in an integrated manner.

Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700, and display effects related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operating unit 800 to the production standby state while starting at 81, the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, an LED that irradiates light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side that attracts attention can be used. By lighting up the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870. .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction, so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotated along the coaxial circle. The player may be allowed to visually recognize the information as if the player is doing so. In addition, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 sequentially reaches the position to which light is irradiated from the LED through an integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 are both provided with vertically elongated decorations and can be visually recognized as one unit. In particular, the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, thereby enhancing the ability to be seen as an integral part.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71(a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70(b), the first operation Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a horizontally long decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operating unit 700 also has a horizontally long decoration. can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate effect state of the second operating unit 700, if the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. 71(a), the covering member 787 and The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the ability to see them as one unit can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making it appear as if the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is expanding to the right from the right edge RE1 of the area Even if the second performance surface 661b is arranged closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second performance surface 661b as if it were arranged at the center of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the second main decorative surface 787b1. The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized as one can be enhanced.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second presentation surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second presentation surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are visually recognized as one.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in an effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70(d). In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 Therefore, even if the first operating unit 600 is kept in the extended state, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the left and right sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are directed to the front side, it has been described above that it can be made in a state where it does not have discrimination ability, but as shown in FIG. 70(d), Furthermore, the player may be able to identify the content by combining different sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the content of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the drive of the second operating unit 700 in this state, pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is a loss, the state shown in FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to the state shown in FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700 by continuing the reversal from the state shown in FIG. 70(d) to the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an effect standby state. Note that above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are written horizontally, so that the player can see them as one unit. Easy to do. In addition, since the content is a series of meanings with "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In the first operation unit 600, in the production standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first production surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them as a whole. Furthermore, since the content is a series of meanings with "Normal Time", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In this manner, in this embodiment, each of the presentation surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is made to be seen as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It consists of Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an effect standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 because the third operation unit 800 performs an integral rotation operation. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is executed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same unified state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so that the switching rotation operation is executed at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during symbol fluctuation to notify whether the jackpot has been won or not. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether or not a jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the final stage of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game is a jackpot hit or not. It is possible to maintain the same level of expectations among people. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form decorations that can be viewed individually or in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only in each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration in which each of the operation units 600 to 800 is related to each other.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be executed is affected by their arrangement. That is, if each of the operating units 600 to 800 is driven at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that component operations will collide and malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the components of other units. controlled as follows.

For example, the change of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state may be performed in any state of the second operating unit 700, and the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to be executed when it is determined that it is in the production standby state. Ru.

The change to the intermediate production state of the first operating unit 600 may be performed as long as the state of the second operating unit 700 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operating unit 700 may be performed in any state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

The change to the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700 can be performed as long as the state of the first operating unit 600 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

In the control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and no rotation is performed or only an integral rotation operation occurs, the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that the process is in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and causes the switching rotation operation is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the production standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in the production standby state. be done.

As described above, drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 is not possible at arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of members of other units.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the balls once flow down to the front side by the sorting device 300 and then flow down to the rear, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by forming a plurality of path bends or by forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a part that flows down toward the front side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the falling of the ball is blocked by contact. Any shape that can be used is fine. For example, it may be configured with an inclined planar shape, or may be formed with a large number of small protrusions protruding from the planar surface, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case is explained in which the ball flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right center portions of the specific prize opening 65a, and the ball may be formed to be able to directly flow into the third flow path forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one ball at a time, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a as a group, the ball can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning a prize opening 65a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming section 335. Furthermore, in this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left-right direction, or immediately after flowing down in the front-rear direction (flowing down towards the near side). Branching to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may also occur.

In the first embodiment described above, the channel directions and inclinations of the flow channel components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of "laying down" that is routinely performed.

Laying refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 not in a vertical position but in a tilted state in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a position where it is tilted backwards by approximately one degree. Compared to the explanation of the above-mentioned sorting device 300 alone (state without aging), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front and back direction. The meaning of the slope of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is downwardly inclined by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although they are designed to be inclined, when considering the installation angle, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path that slopes downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, regarding the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly different in the second flow path configuration section 335. becomes smaller. Therefore, since the speed of the ball flowing down in the left and right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than passing through the third flow path forming part 336. It can be passed between.

In this way, the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the rest of the Pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path forming part 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of bending (approximately 1 degree), the direction of flow of the ball in the flow path forming parts 334, 336 will change depending on the quality of bending (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the tilt angle.

In addition, in a configuration in which the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front and back direction, and the flow path is visible, slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the flow path may cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be ascertained. If you really want to understand the degree of aging, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured to be easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are arranged around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "staleness" cannot be ascertained from the slight difference in the velocity of the ball. 162 are arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged on the lower side to reduce visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made poor except from the normal player's line of sight (in the range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 to determine the degree of "slumber" of the Pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slope of the first flow path forming part 334 is larger than the slope of the third flow path forming part 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, this slope relationship may be reversed, or the slopes may be configured with the same slope.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape or may have a stepwise bent flow path shape.

Furthermore, although the flow path is configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or may be bent at an obtuse angle at the connection point. Additionally, crunes may be employed as each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

Although the first embodiment described above is designed such that the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming section 336 is 0.3 seconds, the design is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed such that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is transferred to the ball on the downstream side. In this case, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the balls flowing down.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protrusions are provided that are elongated and protrude alternately from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the downward direction of the game ball, and the protrusions collide with the game balls. It may also be configured to slow down the ball. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the path length.

Note that the deceleration protrusions may be arranged evenly over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, by forming a protrusion only in the third flow path configuration part 336 without forming a protrusion in the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335, the third flow path configuration part 336 It is possible to configure the ball to flow slowly down the third flow path forming part 336 while allowing the ball to reach the point quickly.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are provided may be such that they are protruded alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the ball's downward path, or they may be protruded from the bottom to the top at a predetermined interval. You can also go in that direction.

In the case of a protrusion from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer walls toward the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side but toward the partition plate section 338 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of protruding upward from the bottom, the protrusion itself may function as a cover for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the height and position of the protrusion in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

Note that the protrusion may be formed to be movable in and out. In this case, it may be possible to stop the ball from flowing down in the extended state and to resume the ball's flow when the ball is in the sunken state.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described where the user is blindfolded by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be hidden by the decorative member. This decorative member may be driven or may be operated by the weight of the ball.

Furthermore, when the ball is used to blind the user, the ball is not limited to being placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is disposed on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the ball is disposed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If this is done, a blinding function can be created.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be placed behind the gaming area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning hole 63 may be blindfolded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the channel forming portions 334 to 336 are formed from linear channels capable of guiding balls one by one, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path with multiple branches, or the flow path width may be large or small, and in areas where the flow path width is large, balls may easily accumulate. may be configured.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a blinding effect is produced by the ball heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be hidden by the discharge path and a ball disposed in the discharge path.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a exclusively passes through the first flow path configuration section 334 and flows to the second flow path configuration section 335 side (near side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-like distribution mechanism that distributes the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path configuration part 335, so that some of the balls are sorted. The balls may flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device so as to operate in a constant manner from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power on of the Pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of ball entering changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball enters exceeding the count number (10 pieces/round) (excess winning), it is configured so that the ball flows to the second flow path forming part 335 side. It's okay. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second channel forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of paid out excess prize balls, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

For example, in a configuration where the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full) and the ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the second channel forming part 335 side. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

When the displacement is performed by the weight of the balls, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or a different action may be performed depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning hole 65a, The balls may also flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. Also, the reverse is also possible.

Further, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the time for the ball to flow down from the specific prize opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, a certain number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and subsequent balls are The liquid may be discharged without passing through the flow path forming section 335. Thereby, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the gaming area. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the specific winning hole 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or when viewed from the front. It may be configured to be placed on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be made to be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player obtains from the falling ball on the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. You can easily check whether you have earned it or not.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 may be arranged in such a manner that the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336. Also good. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path forming section 336.

In the first embodiment described above, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach the ball, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be caused to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows to follow the leading ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Here, if the trailing ball is in a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the front ball, the player can set the timing at which the flow of the front ball changes toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 (downward) to the trailing ball. It is hidden and cannot be seen. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball does not enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effect of the time saving state and the probability variation state can be made similar to maintain the player's sense of expectation. In a gaming machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, The degree of freedom in the downward direction of the ball is increased by arranging a It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 and each of the protrusions 317 to 319 are formed separately, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the respective protrusions 317 to 319 may be configured to protrude from the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as the operation pattern Y in which the possibility of being hidden by a ball is taken into account, but the operation pattern is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be incorporated to cause the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the ball.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed depending on the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide elongated hole 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed using magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, a plurality of positions can be formed where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ while the rotating member 620 is rotating. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape that allows the supported member 640 to be guided so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the guide slot 616 is fixed, but the guide hole 616 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is changed by a predetermined switching means (for example, another drive device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide elongated hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured to be able to change shape.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 and the first presentation surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and to the left, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured such that the performance surface is directed forward and diagonally to the right when it is placed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or when it is placed on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The display surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (downward) in the front direction.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal side of the displacement, but the structure is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member functions favorably to ensure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a horizontally sliding member is fixed to the active side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.) limited to. On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that, irrespective of this favorable effect, a linear sliding member may be connected to the active side of the supported member 640.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and the three sides intersecting at right angles are decorated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured to be stop controllable in a posture with each side facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at right angles, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the front-rear component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the second operating unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is disposed near the elongated hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet is configured to generate an attractive force with a magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710, and this attractive force It may be arranged so that this is more likely to occur in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when using the coil spring CS2, the biasing force is not limited to one that is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured so that the biasing force is generated in response to the expansion displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of using the elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode may be adopted in which it protrudes to the front side by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from below to the front, or the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be extended forward from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction so that the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized together, thereby reducing the discriminating ability. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, instead of a mode in which the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 rotate while facing the front side, it may be a mode in which they rotate while facing left and right outwards. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 commonly use the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 in the shape of a single stroke, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, depending on the design of the groove, the rotating member The rotation timing of 834 can be defined.

In the first embodiment described above, a case will be described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has switched to the integral rotation operation by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from a state in which the detected part 844 is placed on the detection sensor 813. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 when the detected part 844 is not placed on the detection sensor 813, detecting that the detected part 844 has entered the detection sensor 813 can prevent the switching rotation operation from occurring. It may be determined that the operation has switched to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in some places, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing the torque limiter 866, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to occur regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so a torque limiter is better at reducing displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plating portion 871a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is placed on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (on the inner diameter side of the circle), so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833, but during the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 When the metal rod 833 is placed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle), the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle) is exposed, making it possible to reflect the light LD1. It is.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path configuring means blinds the passing means>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the path forming means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass, and the path forming means is configured to It is characterized by comprising a displaceable means that can be placed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passing means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path forming means. Game machine A1.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and in which the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302. There is a machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the decorative board 302 makes it difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is necessary to confirm whether the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and to continue or stop shooting the game ball. It was not possible to accommodate the game mode of playing, and there was a possibility that players would feel dissatisfied. That is, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the portions related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route configuring means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, when the first game ball is easily visible, it is easier to check the flow of the first game ball and decide whether to continue or stop the game ball firing operation. Improvements can be made in related areas.

Note that the form of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is movable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means Compared to the case where other decorative members are prepared as a decorative member, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-back direction path formed with a front-back width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, since the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball, the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward-rearward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path forming means at a firing interval set in the firing device. A game machine A4 characterized in that the game ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path forming means at the same firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball by the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3 or A4, in the front-rear direction path, the front-side component is arranged closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A3 or A4, the forward and backward direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the passed means, so that the first game ball It is possible to easily cause a situation where the ball is hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfolding can be improved.

A gaming machine A6 in the gaming machine A5, wherein the front-side component is arranged in line of sight of the player looking at the means to be passed.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A5, a similar blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is thought that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the better the blindfold effect can be, but if the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight, When the game balls are arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the route configuring means includes a front-rear direction route formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction path thereof. A game machine A7 comprising: a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the player's line of sight can also be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left and right path, so the player cannot see the passed means. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only when the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left or right, but also when the passing means is viewed with a line of sight that is shifted left or right and looks like a peek. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the means to be passed, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This effect is significantly produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with walls. That is, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by a wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, making it easy to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the route configuring means has a first downstream route in which the game ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second downstream route in which the game ball passes in a second manner. and a downstream path, wherein the first game ball can be visually recognized at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which downstream path of the path configuration means the first game ball flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down the route configuring means, regardless of whether or not the passing means passes. , it is possible to improve attention to the game balls flowing down the route forming means.

Note that the first aspect and the second aspect are not limited at all. For example, the downward direction of the balls may be different, or the detection sensors through which the balls pass may be different.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 is provided with a branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received gaming ball, The game machine A9 is characterized in that the route configuring means is constructed such that the game balls whose falling paths are separated by a branching means are configured so that the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route in a predetermined section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game balls that reach the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball compared to the case where the flow pattern corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the route forming means includes a protruding part that protrudes toward the flowing game balls, and the protruding part acts on the branching of the game balls in the branching means. Machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the protruding portion can act on the branching of the game ball, so that the structure is simpler than, for example, when the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body. can improve the durability of

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding part includes a first protruding part extending in a predetermined direction and a second protruding part extending in a direction different from the first protruding part, and the first protruding part A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion is different from the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the influence that the first protrusion has on the game ball and the influence that the second protrusion has on the game ball, depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down. can be made different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first protruding portion and second protruding portion, it is possible to produce an effect of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the downward flow mode of the game ball.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of the ball passing through the path configuring means to the passing means>
A route configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the route configuring means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuring means to pass, and the route configuring means is configured to have a higher speed than the passing means. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined part constituting an upstream side, the predetermined part being arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passing means and configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passing means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize with a decorative plate 302, and a large winning part 300 is provided. Depending on the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which the game balls may fall away from the decorative board 302, or the game balls may flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, in special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the highly visible game balls that come off the decorative board 302 and flow down are configured so that they deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player pays attention to the game ball. Since things tend to be wasted, there is a possibility that players may feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the way the game ball flows down after it has attracted attention so that it is meaningful to draw attention to.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined part placed on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of attention to the game ball can be improved; This can be associated with the game ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flown down the predetermined portion passes through the passing means, so that it is possible to improve the point that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball that has attracted attention.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means. be able to.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

Note that the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed on the display device side that easily catches players' attention, it may be placed on the prize opening side or the starting opening side, it may be placed on the front side (near side) that is easy for players to see, or it may be placed on the front side (front side) that is easy for players to see. The stage side (mainly the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball is temporarily held) is a place where the ball tends to attract attention as a place where the probability of ball landing is significantly high, and the side where the game ball is temporarily held is directly connected to winning the jackpot. The V prize opening side, the ball rental device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the area where the game ball that strayed from the ball entry opening flows down (the area where players are frustrated and follow it with their eyes), The bright side or other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, a less conspicuous side may be intentionally formed to make it relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine B1, the route configuring means includes a second predetermined part that makes the game ball that enters the route configuring means less noticeable than when the ball enters the route, and the predetermined part has a larger area than the second predetermined part. Game machine B2 is characterized in that it is placed on a conspicuous side.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, before the game ball that enters the path forming means flows down the predetermined part, the attention force is lowered in the second predetermined part, so that the game ball can flow down the predetermined part. It is possible to highlight the attention of the game ball when playing.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, wherein the predetermined section includes sections in which the falling speed of the gaming ball is different.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to improve the effect of attracting the player's gaze compared to the case where there is no difference in the falling velocity of the gaming balls.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that enters the path forming means reaches the predetermined part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B4, there is a section where the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different, regardless of the magnitude of the actual falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball at any predetermined location when viewed in a predetermined direction, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and diverted from other parts. .

Note that the manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line disposed on a plane orthogonal to the front-back direction when viewed from the front may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component, or the case of displacement on a straight line and the case of displacement on a straight line that has a front-back component, The difference may be in the case where the displacement is curved or meandering, or it may be different.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B5 is provided with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce a game ball into the path forming means, and the predetermined part is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, visibility of the introducing means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to both ensure the visibility of the introduction means and improve the attention of the game ball, which has a high possibility of passing through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured to cause the game ball on the front side of the path forming means to flow downward so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passing means or the predetermined part. A gaming machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to be able to flow downward on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game ball is directed to the passing means. Since an avoidance means is provided to avoid this, it is possible to both secure the size of the game area and ensure the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means.

Note that the manner in which the game ball falls under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow downward while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or it may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or it may flow down while avoiding the position in front of the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position. It's fine, and anything else is fine.

In the gaming machine B7, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game balls cannot be accepted, and the accepting state changing means is , a game machine B8 characterized in that, in changing the state from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the game ball that has reached the accepting state changing means in the accepting state can be guided to the path configuring means side. .

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down in a bridging manner after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. Can be done.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with a dividing means that is disposed above the passing means when viewed from the front and that divides a gaming area, and that the dividing means is configured such that the game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. Characteristic game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B7 or B8, the dividing means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the passing means, so that the field of view toward the passing means can be improved. It can be made easier to secure.

Note that the mode of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes a falling surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entry hole forming means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the partition means may be a means whose shape (appearance) is fixed or a means whose shape (appearance) is variable.

In the game machine B9, the route configuring means includes an acceptance state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an acceptance state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the falling game balls cannot be accepted, and A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide the game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, it is possible to configure the game ball to be received by the partitioning means to push the game ball into the receiving state changing means while it is being received by the receiving state changing means. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that skids while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on the left-right axis is assumed as the acceptance state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the partitioning means. . A game ball that reaches the special prize opening just before the opening/closing plate is about to close is often caught between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and is moved in the forming direction of the edge ( It skids in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate.

After skidding, the game ball can reach any position in the formation range of the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate, so if at least a part of the opening/closing plate is placed above the means to be passed, There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passing means after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it becomes necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, which reduces the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate. become.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball after skidding from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.

Any one of the game machines B7 to B10 is characterized in that the game balls flowing down the route configuring means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the route configuring means are configured to flow down in a similar flowing manner. A gaming machine B11.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the game balls that may flow down the route configuring means and pass through the passed means, and the game balls that may flow down the front side of the route configuring means By making it difficult to distinguish between game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route configuring means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the game balls flowing down near the route configuring means whether the game ball can easily enter the route configuring means or when it cannot easily enter the route configuring means.

A gaming machine B12, which is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and includes a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the front side of the ball flowing down a predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the length of the route to the V entrance in a space-saving manner>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; and a first state in which a game ball can flow down to the passing means. a state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state; A game machine C1, characterized in that it is configured to allow a game ball to flow downward toward the passing means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution section 75 configured to be movable from side to side is disposed in the falling path of a game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 12, and the distribution section 75 is configured to be movable from side to side. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the direction of flow (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is essential that the allocating section 75 operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winnings in the specific area 73 and the ball being bitten by the allocating section 75, and some players may There were cases where the player felt unsure of the behavior of the portion 75 and was unable to continue playing the game with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second grand prize opening 12 to a position near the left and right center of the gaming area (near the first grand prize opening 10), the second grand prize opening 12 can be A long flow path length up to the distribution section 75 can be ensured. It is thought that this makes it possible to reduce the possibility of winning a prize in the specific area 73 by mistake.

On the other hand, if this means is implemented, it will be necessary to ensure visibility of the falling path of the game ball over a wide range from the second big prize opening 12 to the first big prize opening 10, and within this range there will be no freedom in designing the gaming area. degree is limited. That is, in order to avoid erroneous winnings in the specific area 73, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area is restricted over a wide range.

In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding incorrectly entering game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route configuring means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the route configuring means in front view is shortened to save space, the route configuring means can be inserted into the route configuring means. It is possible to secure a long time for the game ball to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route configuring means. Wrong winnings can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device for a short period of time to switch whether or not a ball can enter the constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating in a hurry. Thereby, it is possible to avoid entering the game ball by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be adopted in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed on the downstream path, or a mode may be provided in which a predetermined downstream path is provided in which the game ball flows down a downstream path having a front-back component.

In the game machine C1, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is more likely to cause the game ball to flow down than the downstream path toward the back side. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game machine C2 increases.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to ensure a long period during which the player is allowed to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down a predetermined flowing path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is better than the downstream path that flows down while maintaining the front and back position. A game machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down is increased.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to ensure a long period of time during which the player can visually see the gaming balls flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined downstream path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means is provided with a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the predetermined downstream paths are such that the game ball is positioned in front of the passing means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the game ball is placed in the front position, the visibility of the vicinity of the passing means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the area near the means to be passed.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of the front positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, it is possible to hide at least a portion of the game balls on the back side by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side than the game balls on the back side, the view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, if the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined downstream path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so it is possible to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen. It becomes possible.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the route forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the path forming means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, compared to the case where a folded path is formed, there is no need to reduce the thickness of the channel wall, so the strength of the flow path can be improved. The possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-rear passage section extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the horizontal width of the route configuring means can be suppressed, so that the pair of route configuring means can be configured with bilateral symmetry and a suppressed lateral width. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the passing means is arranged diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving section of the path forming means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C7, it is possible to easily fit the passing means and the ball receiving part of the route configuring means in the field of view of the player who views from the front side. .

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, the route configuring means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls, and a means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to accept game balls. a second receiving means in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means; Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times, and furthermore, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the manner in which the second receiving means receives the game balls, attention to the game balls can be improved.

Note that the manner in which game balls are accepted is not limited in any way. For example, game balls may be received only in the first receiving means, game balls may be received only in the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means receives game balls only. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be accepted by the means may also be used. Further, the frequency of balls entering each receiving means may be different, or the ball entering position may be different.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the first receiving means and the second receiving means A game machine C10 characterized in that the problem occurs depending on whether a game ball is received by both of the game balls.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the falling game balls, or the benefits related to the game obtained by the falling game balls (paying out prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state becoming variable after the jackpot ends, etc.) The game state may change to the normal state (falling down, etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the route configuring means is configured such that the path from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means is symmetrical.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly fired from the left or right side.

In any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted; A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change, so that the player's skill regarding shooting the game ball is improved. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

A gaming machine C13 in the gaming machine C12, characterized in that the state change mode of the acceptance state changing means is configured in a plurality of types.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C12, even when the game balls are ejected in a fixed ejection manner, the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means is improved. can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted based on the state change mode of the acceptance state change means.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that moves parallel to the downward direction of the ball>
a route forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route forming means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the route configuring means, and the state switching means is configured such that the direction of the displacement that occurs in the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine XA1 characterized in that it is configured along a direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without involving the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downward direction of the game ball, the state of the game ball in the state where the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means is By causing a displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling manner of the game ball to change. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when a game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top of it, the ball will move in the forward direction of rolling rotation relative to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the left with the game ball on top of it, the rolling rotation can be controlled against the game ball. Since a load is applied to rotate the game ball in the opposite direction, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Furthermore, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having a component not only in the rolling direction of the game ball but also in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a change in the falling pattern of the game ball to occur in a complex and irregular manner.

Due to these influences on the falling state of the game ball, the falling state of the ball riding on the state switching means can be varied in various ways during the opening/closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball becomes bored. You can concentrate on playing the game without worrying about it.

Moreover, the arrangement relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be such that it rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or it may be arranged such that it opposes the game ball in the downstream direction and collides with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in such a manner as to collide with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the closing operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is flowing down, and the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation is performed in the forward direction of the direction in which the game ball is flowing, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. It may be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that causes the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
a path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passing means; A state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means, and the state switching means is capable of guiding the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended to the front, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. Therefore, I will not provide any guidance. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the falling of the game ball (such as a frame part). There is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Since no members are required, the number of required components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the downward direction of the game ball in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set horizontally with respect to a game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in direction after the state switching means starts guiding. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guiding action by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide part may be disposed on a movable member included in the state switching means, or the guide part may be disposed on a non-movable part around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide part by the movement of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state where it is easy to approach or come into contact with it.

When the guide part is disposed on a movable member, the design must take into consideration not only the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. It is preferable to do so.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of flow of the game balls, rather than providing a wall with a planar shape perpendicular to the direction of flow, it is preferable to )-shaped wall portion makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction of causing the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

<Sequence of separation, reversal, combination, and rotation>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable so that the visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined manner of displacement, the first displacement A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable multiple times (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotating base 214 rotates and displaces, the surface visible to the player side is the same, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacing means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the visible surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable as the displacement means is displaced, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined manner includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other with respect to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together, and a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement member that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, with only the first displacement as the displacement based on the gathering part, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the gathering part is the shortest or longest, and the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced. The first displacement member and the second displacement member may appear stationary, which may reduce the production effect, but by mixing the second displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can also be caused at the terminal end. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the displacement in the predetermined manner includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visible by the third displacement, the decorations visible to the player before and after the third displacement can be noticeably different. can be set.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by adsorption or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it operates in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixation is reduced. The displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed by taking these into consideration.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission through gears, mechanical displacement would occur if shape deformation was not taken into consideration, but if the load associated with fixing is taken into account, elastic changes in the member due to that load will become apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to differ depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixing differs depending on the side that is visually recognized, it is possible to set the strength of the fixing on the side that is visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly combined to make it easy to see as an integral part, and the other surface is loosely combined to make it easy to see in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can be done.

Furthermore, for example, by configuring the degree of attraction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different depending on the fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. can.

Note that the manner in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape or may utilize the attraction force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed to use, for example, fixing screws, screws, or the like as the metal parts that are attracted to the magnet.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, it is displaced in the forward direction in a first displacement manner, and in the reverse direction in the first displacement mode. A game machine D5 that is configured to be displaced in a second displacement manner different from the displacement manner, and the second displacement manner is configured such that after being displaced in a predetermined manner, the game machine is displaced in the first displacement manner.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is set before the first displacement mode. Since the displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. This makes it possible to reduce the attention paid to the displacement means at the time of retreat, thereby relatively increasing the attention paid to the displacement means displaced at the production position.

With conventional machines, the manner of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after extending to the presentation position (the position in front of the liquid crystal display area) and producing the effect, before retracting to the retraction position (position outside the liquid crystal display area). Had to rotate again multiple times in the opposite direction. In this case, there was a possibility that it would become a problem that the line of sight would tend to focus on the member that is retreating from the presentation position.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Moreover, the displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

A game machine D6 in the game machine D5, wherein the displacement means includes a release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacing means can be changed by varying the operational resistance of the internal structure of the displacing means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 includes a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the displacement unit, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the surface to be viewed is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. You can change it by changing it.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light as a unit. It can be changed with .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Features gaming machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structures during displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement and contraction can be performed to some extent after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress the increase in attention to the displacement means when displacing from the presentation position to the retreat position, compared to the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement manner including enlargement/contraction from the start of displacement. .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means can be reduced. Note that various types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or it may be a numerical value related to a change in the operational manner when the operational manner changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement proximal end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished, if the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the two are indistinguishable from each other.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the states of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed toward the player. It is possible to maintain high expectations of the player for the occurrence of this event.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means with multiple visible surfaces>
The displacement means includes a first visible surface and a second visible surface that are configured to be visible, and the displacement means is arranged so that the first visible surface is easily visible, and the first visible surface is in a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversing unit 71 configured to be reversible, and are configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visible surface (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the visible surface. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state where the first visible surface is easily visible and a state where the second visible surface is easy to see, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of a player who wants to look at the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of changing the arrangement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured such that the open part side is easily recognized.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the displacement means is disposed at the edge of the opening, the displacement means is closer to the back side than when it is disposed at the center of the opening. .

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is arranged at the center of the opening, the displacing means can be largely seen on the front side, and the displacing means can be placed on the edge of the opening. When the displacement means is arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of another group are configured to be difficult to see when the surface is visible.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, by applying different characters and figures to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, the displacement means A first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set that are not intended to be visually recognized are configured so that different characters and figures can be visually recognized by a player who visually recognizes them. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement means from becoming unsightly in appearance.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface. When characters or figures indicating a high expectation of a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a jackpot is displayed through the displacement means, regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means retreats from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display indicating the expectation of a jackpot can be maintained by the displacement means, so that the player who has taken his/her line of sight away from the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue displaying a display regarding the expectation of a jackpot.

Note that there are no limitations to the manner in which it is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation), the first visible surface displayed to the player side. and the set of second visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

Note that there is no limitation on the manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be connectable and separable so that they can be combined and separated. It may be made difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be made difficult to recognize by making the part relatively dark by setting the brightness and darkness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the form of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the switching operation described above, only one part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is operated facing the back side so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in a state in which some of these parts and other parts are visible at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and that the switching operation is performed with the displacement means disposed at the center of the opening part. Game machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and it is possible to improve attention to the switching action.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the first visible surface and the other portion faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Game machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is made visible during operation, and the entire first visible surface is made invisible, so that the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible aspects can be made difficult to recognize.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 includes a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to cover the second displacement means as well as the second displacement means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface to be difficult to see by the second displacement means, the performance position of the displacement means can be changed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement means is displaced. A game machine E9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface that is visible when viewed in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the game The surface that is easy to visually recognize can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the person's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. can.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes an auxiliary means configured to be disposed close to the displacement means, in the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means. A gaming machine E11 is located apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9 or E10, there are two states in which the auxiliary means is disposed close to the displacement means so that they can be seen together, and a state where the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separately seen. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacement means gives to the player.

Note that the form of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to switch between a state where the auxiliary means is visible integrally with the displacement means and a state where it is visible separately from the displacement means. .

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between making the displacement means and the auxiliary means visible integrally or separately, so that variations in the visible mode depending on the number of members are possible. can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the arrangement means at the same time differs between sections>
A displacing means configured to be displaceable, a disposing means in which a first portion is disposed on the displacing means, and a supporting means for supporting a second portion of the displacing means, the supporting means A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion during displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a game machine that is equipped with a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotary accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see official bulletin). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted, there is a possibility that a malfunction will occur in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotary accessory 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, resulting in a low degree of freedom in displacement.

That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the arrangement means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

Note that the form of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported in a manner in which displacement is limited by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected and supported by a second movable displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by a wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range that supports the second section when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second section is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacing means is constant, the displacing speed of the disposing means can be varied, and the supporting means Since it is configured to allow a change in the displacement direction of the second portion, the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine F3 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, wherein the support means includes a restriction section that limits displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the side with larger displacement toward the side with smaller displacement, it is possible to easily stop the second portion at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

Note that the aspect of the load required for displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or pushed.

Note that the form of the restricting portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to set an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be a mode in which the direction of displacement of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means is based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that a relative displacement amount of is smaller than a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section in which the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means is small at a mid-displacement position of the displacing means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily seen together, and as a result, the displacement means and the arrangement means can be seen together. You can increase the number of easy positions.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion can be changed.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arrangement means on the supporting means side Since it is possible to change the displacement speed of the disposing means, it is possible to create an action performance in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is made variable by simple drive control (uniform speed drive) of the driving means.

A gaming machine F6, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the supporting means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to make it easier to stop the arrangement means at an early stage at the end of the displacement.

Note that the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced; A method may also be used in which the displacement of the second portion is restricted by a geometrical device such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Furthermore, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, but may also include increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved by applying a load using magnetic force or the like at the end of the displacement of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved using a biasing force such as a coil spring. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the support means is configured to track the displacement trajectory of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion, and the displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of displacement. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that the displacement locus of the displacement is configured to intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F6, the support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part due to the displacement of the first part allows the second part to be moved even when the first part stops. The return displacement (bound) of the part 2 can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7 is provided with a supported means displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex effect can be performed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arrangement means.

Note that the mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arrangement means on a predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced, or the arrangement means may be displaced at a position away from the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced (e.g. , a sliding displacement mode on a predetermined plane) may be a different displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis).

Note that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a change in posture, or it may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first part is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second part has a section in which it can be reciprocated in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first part. Game machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F8, while the first part is displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

A gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made the same as that of the displacing means with the arrangement means in between. This can give the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arrangement means includes a posture changing means that changes its posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between a first surface and a second surface as the placement means is displaced; A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in a posture facing the player when the second portion is placed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion reaches the end of displacement. Since the player can understand that the game has been reached, it is possible to configure the final stage of the performance operation by the displacement means in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine Z3 characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening/closing plate (introduction means, acceptance state changing means, part of avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (part of partition means, avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front-rear long protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusions, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right external protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Medium member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path sections)
335 Second flow path configuration part (predetermined part, part of path configuration means, left/right direction path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path section)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 First operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a Straight part (part of support means, first range, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (attitude changing means)
661a 1st production surface (1st visible surface, 1st surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787a2 First secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting section (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second covered part (part of visible surface)
C1 Color (part of arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of the arrangement means, second part)
P1 Ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Definite change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a rotating base disposed at the tip of a base arm is configured to be rotatable multiple times (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116782

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain attention to the displacement means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member, a second displacement member, and a second displacement member. member, and is configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced in a predetermined manner of displacement.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable prize winning device and a distribution device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable prize winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable prize winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable prize winning device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is a figure showing the time measurement change of the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate of the variable prize winning device and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member of the sorting device in the first round in each jackpot type. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an extended state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the first operating unit in an extended state. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member due to rotational displacement of a rotational member. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle due to rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. 28. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. be. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. be. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an up-and-down reversal member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverting member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 2 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the drive mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are accessed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it becomes possible to shield various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 from being visible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of In the high probability state (during certain variation) in this embodiment, the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of variations (in this embodiment, 100 variations), and the probability of winning a second symbol (described later) increases, resulting in a second This includes a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more easily than when the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window of the base plate 60. It is set up. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is activated for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 140a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 140, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the prize opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various parts (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. In FIG. 6(a), the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning opening 65a, and in FIG. The opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 changes the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state so that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b can be received and guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right center of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are limited to those that deviate from the electric accessory 140a and drift down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right center portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward as it goes toward the back side from the lower end of the front end which is arranged opposite to the front end). The degree to which momentum is lost due to collision can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either in the front or the rear. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in side view is arranged at the lower front side, thereby making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening/closing plate 65b side. Further, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left and right widths become smaller toward the bottom at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the balls that have landed on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without leakage. On the near side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right outward by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the right and left sides of the inclined flow downward surface 163a1, guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined downward flow surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner walls of the receiving member 163 to the front side and the left and right inner side, and has a front end surface as an inclined surface whose arrangement is shifted rearward as the left and right inner side increases. It is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the slope, so that the ball can be guided down the slope. 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts its closing operation with a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is located on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will not continue. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, if the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that is swept backward due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening/closing plate 65b (in the front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b will open unintentionally or otherwise malfunction.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b closes by a rising motion. That is, the ball that landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so it does not come close to the left or right position of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, but instead lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The balls being ridden are almost always guided to the specific winning hole 65a.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged closer to the left and right outer sides or there are a large number of balls, there is a possibility that the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will be delayed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific prize opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

Moreover, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed into a flat shape (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward, and then flows in the left and right direction due to the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will once move backward in parallel, so it is possible to avoid the balls colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b has a horizontally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a and a horizontal flow is formed in the rolling ball, the rolling surface on the opening/closing plate 65b is Since the possibility that the movement of the ball will become irregular can be reduced, unintended malfunctions can be prevented.

The receiving member 163 is formed with contact surface portions 163a3 that come into contact with the rotating tips at both left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby increasing the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b. There is. The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of left and right sides, and are designed to have a shape that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact, so that the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily stabilized. In addition, by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening/closing plate 65b with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the ball from flowing downward is disposed on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured so as not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is chipped, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 This is intended to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. Thereby, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since contact with the opening/closing plate 65b occurs when the contact surface portion 163a3 has a normal shape, there may be a disadvantage that load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball that is being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be configured to be received by being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

That is, in the state in which the ball is being accepted (for example, in a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball does not match the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down inside the specific winning a prize opening 65a by being guided by its curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where a ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming section 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path forming section 336. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged on the right and left sides of the electric accessory 140a. limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to the left and right outer positions than the electric accessory 140a. Thereby, on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to secure visibility at the left and right inner positions than the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be explained. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG.7 and FIG.8, the state where the structure other than the 1st winning a prize opening 64, the 2nd winning a prize opening 140, and the variable winning a prize device 65 among the structures arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, there are balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). A collection gutter 150 is provided in which a path for flowing the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the groove-shaped portion facing the base plate 60 is open. By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for the ball that enters the first winning port 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path for the ball that enters the second winning port 140. and a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form flow paths for the ball that enters the general winning hole 63 arranged on both the left and right sides, respectively.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left direction, and the second flow path section 152 slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right direction. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending below the general winning a prize opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, although the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the gaming area, the flow of the balls that enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is , are moved from the center position to the left and right sides by the collecting gutter 150. Thereby, a space can be provided below the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and this space can be used to arrange the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300. It is an exploded rear perspective view of. Note that in FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, and illustrations of other parts are omitted, and illustrations of other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, The base of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, collection gutter 150, and distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

In the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collection gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collection gutter 150, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are, whether the distribution device 300 is provided or the distribution device 300 is not provided. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 can be used in common.

Next, details of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the gaming area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution device 300 constitutes a downstream path through which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change based on the detection result of the ball flowing down the downstream path of the distribution device 300, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member disposed on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and a receiving member 163 is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive the ball that has passed through the specific prize opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connecting part with the sorting device 300; A state switching device 165 is fastened to and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether electricity is applied or not.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is a flat surface except for the through hole for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific prize opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the back side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the back side inside the thin wall portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 at the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin wall portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through hole of a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be placed is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary part 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate-like shape that is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extended support plates 161b having a substantially T-shape, including a longitudinally elongated plate-like part extending downward at a midway position of the laterally elongated plate-like part.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the rear range of the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support part 161c protrudes from the horizontally long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support part 161d protrudes from the vertically long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary part 161a. The protruding support portion 161e that protrudes from the top surface of the portion has a function of supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical protruding part 161f protruding in a symmetrical shape below the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a contacts the balls flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the balls flowing down. Has a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened parts 161h having internal threads for screwing fastening screws inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary part 161a.

The fastened portion 161i, which has a female thread portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is arranged outside the border portion 161a at the cut (left and right center position) of the border portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, there is a connecting portion between the through hole for passing through the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for passing through the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the fastened portion 161i is disposed.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down within the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161.

On the back side of the front design member 162, there are a plurality of female screws arranged at positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161, and each having a female threaded portion formed in such a manner that a fastening screw inserted into the through hole 161g can be screwed into. It includes a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c that extend toward the back side and have a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

The extending parts 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened part 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened part 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the downward flow path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball riding on the portion 162b from flowing to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations on both the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inwards, so that the ball flowing on the extending portions 162c is The downstream path can be summarized as the downstream path of the ball riding on the extension portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the falling balls are placed (increasing the density of ball placement) compared to the number of falling balls, and to reduce the area where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (where the falling path is (a space that is not constructed) can be secured.

Although the front design member 162 illustrated in FIG. 11 is shown in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by pasting a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 in a geometric pattern, and the groove may be illuminated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent with a plain color or with the above-described decoration added.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, a contact surface portion 163a3, and an auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , a lower surface portion 163a forming a downstream surface on the inside of the frame, a ball passage hole 163b provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c into which the fastening screws arranged in and fastened and fixed to the fastened part 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female threaded part into which the fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and which are located in the left and right center. It includes a pair of fastened parts 163d disposed on the sides, and a plurality of fastened parts 163e each having a female threaded part into which a fastening screw inserted into the state switching device 165 is screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer ends with the left-right center portion as the apex, and an inclined flow that slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step lower from the left and right outer ends of the left-right inclined surface. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so that it can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a main body part 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downwardly toward the rear, and a fastened part of the receiving member 163 that is formed through the upper side of the main body part 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b into which the fastening screws screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is arranged, and both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened parts 164d formed with female threads into which fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened part 164d formed through the upper part of the main body part 164a to be fastened with the fixed member 161. It includes an insertion hole 164e into which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting board 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LED is arranged facing obliquely forward and upward, and when viewed from the front, the light emitting board 164c is positioned directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6), and the second winning prize It is placed directly below the mouth 140. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of a player who desires to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes at the spot diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to light up when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a The player can easily understand whether or not a problem has occurred.

With the above-described configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be fixed more firmly than the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. Further, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the arrangement of the sorting device 300 between the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 and Relative positional displacement can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws screwed into the fastened part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat radiation. A lower case part 165b formed in the shape of a deep box with an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, and an electromagnetic solenoid 165c that is engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and a rotating portion that is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in an arrangement such that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the sliding portion 165d slides. It includes a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted through a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that a rod-shaped portion can be engaged therein, and a transmission protrusion 65c protruding rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b enters into this recessed portion. engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft portion 65d that forms a rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing plate 65b can be opened/closed in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted. , a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted; A substrate 350 is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side, and a substrate 350 is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and changes its state depending on whether or not it is energized. a state switching device 360 that is configured to be able to switch; a slide displacement member 370 that is disposed below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched; An insertion hole is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and is formed through the hole so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough. and a lower member 380 having 381.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which the balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b flow down in the following order: inside the upper member 310, flow path forming parts 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. However, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are configured so that they can be seen by the player, and the way they flow down provides not only a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also provides the player with an effect. It produces an effect related to gaming profits, such as causing a change in profits.

Differences in the manner in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380, the position of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to focus on the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It has been devised with the premise of concentration.

Next, details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The upper member 310 is a thin member made of a light-transmissive resin material and has a U-shape when viewed from above, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed through the hole so as to be able to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent seal members 313 that are pasted as a seal member 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 toward the front side along the outer periphery, and an inner member a plurality of insertion cylinder parts 315 in which through-holes are formed into which fastening screws inserted into the inner member 330 can be inserted; a fastened part 316 having a female thread into which the fastening screws inserted into the middle member 330 can be inserted; A pair of longitudinally elongated protrusions 317, which are longitudinally elongated portions that protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are arranged side by side, and A pair of left and right inner protrusions 318 that are elongated in the left and right direction and are disposed between a pair of front and rear long protrusions 317, and A pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 that are protrudingly provided and elongated in the left and right direction and are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long protrusions 317 and a size that allows the upper part of the board 350 to be placed therein. and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess.

The opening 312 is a passage-like part (tunnel-like part) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b of the variable prize winning device 65 and flows it downward, and the upper front edge is connected to the tilted attitude detection sensor SE1 ( (see FIG. 12) is cut with an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. Thereby, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the attention of the player by receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the board 350 and being visually recognized brilliantly, but the details will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the downward flow path of the ball below the upper member 310. A first upper surface part 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface part connected to the front end of the first upper surface part 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. By configuring the left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b to be longer toward the near side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who views the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface side to receive the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, although the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visible to the player.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having a female threaded portion formed in the middle member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion cylinder portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the threaded portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, although the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made less noticeable to the player viewing the screw head from diagonally above. Thereby, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from becoming poor due to the fastening screws.

The reason why the fastened part 316 is only formed on the right side is because the insertion tube part 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, so one fastening position is sufficient on the front side, and the screw head is facing downward. The reason for this is that the appearance of the sorting device 300 will be better if the arrangement is omitted if it is unnecessary, even if it is less noticeable. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.

The fastened portion 316 is arranged at a position that avoids the downward path of the balls and minimizes deterioration in the appearance of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

The lower surfaces of the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the left and right outer protrusions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved with the same location as a reference, and the arrangement becomes lower as the distance from that location increases. Formed as a surface. This curved surface has different shapes for the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, the left and right inner protruding portions 318, and the left and right outer protruding portions 319, and this difference in shape is intended to control the manner in which the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a box-like shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 and forming a downward flow path for the ball; A pair of second flow path forming portions 335 connected to the front end portion of the flow path forming portion 334 to form a flow path for the sphere and recessed in the front side of the front frame portion 333; and the second flow path forming portions. A pair of third flow path forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 335 to form a flow path for the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the middle member 330 includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and is formed penetrating the lower bottom of the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for the ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangle formed from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. A pair of alignment protrusions 339 are provided as protrusions.

The rear frame portion 332 does not constitute a downward flow path for the ball, unlike the front side portion that configures a downward flow path for the ball, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a that is formed vertically through the front end of the left and right center portions and is configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be placed therein, and a through hole that is elongated in the left and right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b are formed through the lower bottom portion and guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a female screw portion is formed into which a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed. It includes a fastened part 332c and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female screw part at its upper end into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

Since the front frame portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inner side of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 is reduced. The front frame portion 333 is formed into a frame shape that is approximately square in top view, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Equipped with.

The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 are parts that configure the flow path of the ball, and are arranged so that the flow direction of the ball, the inclination angle, etc. are different. The details will be explained later.

In addition, the open part 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 allows the symmetrical protruding part 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable prize winning device 65 to enter. This is a gap for the purpose of That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter into the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge hole 337 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and is configured in a pair on the left and right, and is formed in a size that allows the ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it is configured to have a horizontal length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through hole of the detection sensor SE1. All you have to do is design the shape.

In addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming part 336 as described above, the partition plate part 338 also functions as a guide part that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, but the details will be described later. The positioning protrusion 339 is a part that is fitted into the protrusion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower side part 353 is longer than the upper side part 352 from side to side, and a recess for positioning is provided at the lower end on the left end side of the lower side part 353. 354.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 for positioning in the left and right direction, and the left and right elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 back and forth. The upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off upward, thereby fixing the arrangement. However, the details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. a sliding portion 362 that is engaged with and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and rotates as the slide portion 362 slides. , is provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes from the right side to the right, and a lower side. A guided portion 362c is provided that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of and is formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is a portion that is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, since it is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating part 363 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed into a vertically elongated cylindrical shape at the L-shaped connection part, and has a penetrating portion large enough to allow the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted therethrough. A supporting cylinder part 363a having a hole, an upper cylinder part 363b which projects upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into a through-hole of the overhang part 362b, and a longitudinal part of the L-shape A lower cylindrical portion 363c is provided that protrudes downward from the side tip portion in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable about the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized to cause the plunger to slide and the slide portion 362 to be displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted into the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced, and accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is A thin plate part 371 that is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the thin plate part 380, an upper protruding part 376 that protrudes upward from the thin plate part 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper protruding part 376. A recessed portion 378 is provided at the protruding end of the protruding portion that protrudes upward at the portion, and is formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of supported holes 371a penetrating the left and right portions in the rear half portion, and a longitudinally elongated shape with a left and right width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper protruding portion 376 from the front end in the left and right center portions. A recessed part 372, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that protrude downward in the shape of protrusions along the edges of the recessed part 372, and protrusions along the left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of vertical protrusions 374 are provided in a strip shape and protrude in both vertical directions, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 is provided in a columnar shape and protrudes downward from the rear end portion and is inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Be prepared.

The lower protrusion portion 373 and the upper and lower protrusion portions 374 are portions that are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides, and compared to contact on a plane, the middle member 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protruding portion 376 is a columnar portion having a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper protruding portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376.

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 between the left and right inner gaps, and is configured to suppress displacement in the left-right direction by contacting the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be well guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole elongated in the left-right direction so as to be able to accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 necessary to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-back direction. Ru.

The protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom part of the rear frame part 332, so that the lower cylindrical part of the rotating part 363 The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is such that the entire area where the upper protruding part 376 through which the insertion is planned and the protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is located inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like part 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated from side to side, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors on the lower side of the plate-like part 382. It includes a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are open, and the other portions are closed. is formed.

The plate-shaped part 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, similar to the vertical through-hole formed in the sensor holding frame part 389. A protrusion 383 that is elongated and protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of protrusions that protrude left and right away from the front end of the protrusion 383. a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at a position on the rear side of the protrusion 383; A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer positions than , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape protruding rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed so as to allow insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330. .

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left and right thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed part 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 is configured such that the protrusion 383 is sandwiched between the recessed part 372. Placed. That is, the protruding portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed such that the left and right inner ends are at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are fitted in such a way that they are in contact with the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right sides of the middle member 330 are aligned with respect to the lower member 380. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, by bringing the back surface of the frame front part of the lower member 380 (the part that connects the protrusion part 383 and the protrusion part 383a on the front end side) into contact with the front face of the alignment protrusion part 339, the lower The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid positional deviation between the third flow path forming part 336 as a structure of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in a horizontally elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383, so that, for example, the end of the displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protruding portion 383 can be improved compared to the structure. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

Note that even if the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, it is not a part that would immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, although the guide protrusion 384 is normally designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period of time (for example, 3 years) without damage, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed taking into consideration that they will be used in a state where they collide with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the lifespan of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the design may be such that the strength of the protrusion 383 can withstand the remaining period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in its shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused by a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the middle member 330. In this embodiment, the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided to flow down, and the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. Further, the insertion hole 388 is arranged on the left and right outer sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of parts, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate part 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed part 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-back direction. As a result, the load during guidance can be shared among multiple positions, so it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but by a plurality of members, at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper protrusions 376 are guided by the partition plate part 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed part 372 is guided by the protrusion part 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are improperly assembled and the positional deviation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 will be inhibited. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 keep the displacement to a small value as they are parts that continuously constitute the flow path of the ball, and since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is said to be good, It is possible to guarantee that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes too large, the slide displacement member 370 will not be displaced properly. , control can be performed to issue an error notification based on the possibility that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is incorrect.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in a poor state, and therefore it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Note that, here, a configuration related to the falling of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and a configuration that enters the downstream path of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state arranged at the front side position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be explained.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335 that follows, and the third flow path configuration section 336 that follows are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is formed with the flow direction of the balls flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 as a reference. The third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in the left and right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that flows in the same direction as the previous rotation direction with respect to the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down on the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right-angled bending angle, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow speed of the ball increases toward the downstream side. To be more specific, the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the subsequent flow direction at the second flow path forming part 335 does not have a front-rear component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path forming part 336 following the second flow path forming part 335, the flow is directed backward, which is opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming part 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front and rear direction. It is possible to realize a flow pattern with less influence.

Therefore, for example, unlike a downward flow mode in which the balls consistently flow down in the same direction (for example, to the left) from beginning to end, it is possible to easily prevent the downward speed of the balls from becoming excessive on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to make the falling speed of the ball uniform throughout the channel, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention of the player to the ball, and it is easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming portion 335, but if the second flow path forming portion 335 is formed, clogging of the bulb and backflow can be more easily prevented. When the second flow path configuration section 335 is not formed (when the left-right length of the second flow path configuration section 335 is 0), that is, the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 are When connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the direction of the ball's flow is large, and in particular, the speed direction must be reversed back and forth, so it is difficult to flow the ball smoothly, and balls are likely to accumulate, become clogged, or backflow, causing problems. may occur.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the switching angle of the flowing direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), no reversal of the velocity direction of the ball occurs, so that the ball can flow down smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid ball stagnation, clogging, and backflow.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 will be explained. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protruding part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion located downstream of the ball is further retreated from the path of the ball than a portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f disposed opposite to each other is longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right sides of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow path side surfaces of the second flow path forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (Fig. 17 reference).

Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from causing a backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connecting end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed in a curve at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that is arranged downward toward the front side is provided so as to protrude upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the ball in a manner that bends the direction in which the ball flows down.

That is, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first channel forming section 334, and contacts the side wall section 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the direction of flow, and passing through the second channel forming section 334. The liquid flows down the flow path forming part 335, contacts the symmetrical protrusion 161f while flowing down, switches the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed into a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the protruding support portion 161d of the member to be fixed 161. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

The inclination angle and length ratio in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be explained. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third The flow path forming portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and the common inclination angle is set to be slightly gentler in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 has a front frame part 333 formed in a square shape in top view as an inner side surface, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame part 333. It is formed so that the outer side surface is a large square. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-mentioned large square is 45 mm, so that a flow path with a width of 12 mm is created around the periphery. It is formed.

Therefore, for a normally used ball with a diameter of 11 mm, the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the ball, so the ball will flow down with almost no displacement in the width direction. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Fig. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Fig. 1) is defined as approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance; Can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the ends of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the square-shaped front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path configuration part 334 is Since only the constituting curved protrusion 334b is arranged inside (on the front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path forming section 334 is connected to the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336. It's relatively short.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the channels formed by the second channel forming section 335 and the third channel forming section 336 have approximately the same length (33 mm between sphere centers), and the length is as follows. The length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

From the ratio of the longitudinal inclination angle and length of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 described above, it can be explained that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is not constant. In other words, the time taken to pass through the first flow path forming section 334, which has the largest inclination angle and the shortest path length, is longer than the time required to pass through the second flow path forming section 335, where the inclination angle is gentler and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And it is shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path forming part 336.

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement is moved to the back side, and a portion is hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1. The ball can be quickly displaced to the front side from a state where visibility of the ball is poor, and the state can be switched to a state where the ball is closer to the player and visibility of the ball is high. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move his/her line of sight towards the ball, reducing the burden on the player who focuses on the ball (eyeball movement). eye strain) can be reduced.

When focusing on the balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, which have high visibility in this way, the balls flow down in the left and right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case where the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming part 336, the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is smaller, which reduces the gaming burden on the player who focuses on the ball. , can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 are the same. are considered to be equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball in front view is different, as a result, the apparent velocity of the ball (displacement velocity of the ball in front view) is lower than that of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. The ball flowing down is slower than the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335.

The flow path of the ball only changes at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easy to draw attention to, and in other parts, the flow path of the ball changes from each flow path forming part 334 to 336. It is considered common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight naturally tends to concentrate on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, it is possible to effectively reduce the gaming burden on the player who concentrates his/her line of sight in this way.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the player's view of the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, in this embodiment, an open section 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path forming section 335. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid the flesh part of the second flow path forming part 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path forming part 336.

Further, in the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a, only the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the falling ball is formed, and the formation of the shaped portion on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed to have a thickness vertically, the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is less likely to be obstructed by the symmetrical protruding portion 161f. It can be lowered and visibility can be improved.

Further, the configuration is such that the balls deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and heading toward the outlet 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming part 336, contacts the curved surface part 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow path structure 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path structure 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are visually recognized as being overlapped from front to back, so pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or the ball enters the out port 71 without entering the specific winning port 65a, the ball enters the field of view that focuses on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the ball heads toward the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the configuration of the nails implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge), many of the fired balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion (the portion that attracts the player's attention) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is located at a position that overlaps in the front-back direction the position where the balls (excluding the balls that entered the ball 64 and 140) gather. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the flowing ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is improved except for the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. It is configured to reduce the

For example, on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed in a shape similar to a prism to produce a light diffusion effect. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as having a sawtooth shape is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed over almost the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and above and below.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, so while it is possible to make the surface shine brilliantly, it also prevents the line of sight from being blocked by the light. visibility of the rear side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, visibility is poor in a state where light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when no light is irradiated, visibility is at least as low as in a state where light is irradiated. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a blocking object between the light and the light, the shadow of the blocking object will be visually recognized as a black spot, making it easier to determine its position.

Processed surfaces similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b are also formed in other parts. For example, there is a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side of the left and right external protrusions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side of the front frame of the rear frame portion 332, etc. (Fig. 17 reference).

Further, a processed surface formed in a similar shape is a plate-shaped part extending to the back side of the second upper surface part 314b of the upper member 310, and which is attached to the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in this embodiment, light is diffused on the back side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. A processed surface is formed to create the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed to the left and right from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes looking at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The ball can be hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 to instantly make it difficult to see.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen, from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336 when viewed diagonally from above. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, the light is irradiated onto the light diffusion processed surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball has flowed down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336, it is necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. , it is possible to further improve attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state can be created in which the shadow of the sphere can be easily recognized as a black spot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, visibility of the ball can be switched between good and bad. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the sunspot, it is possible to create a situation in which the sunspot is hidden by the ball and a situation in which the sunspot is visible without being hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the flow formed by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 consistently It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

This can prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. The effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Further, it is possible to prevent the balls from coming into contact with the light-diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, thereby preventing the balls from flowing down or being subjected to deceleration effects. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the channel, the visibility of the ball is reduced even while the ball is flowing down the channel formed by the channel components 334 to 336. This can be avoided.

Note that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to produce an effect of light diffusion and an effect of decelerating the sphere by collision with the sphere.

In the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility remains high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility of the fastening screws is reduced.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used to hide a portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screws reflect the light and shine, so that the light is diffused. The visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and its purpose is not only to make it shine brilliantly, but also to protect the substrate 350 disposed on the back side. and causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The board 350 is accommodated in a supported manner in the rear frame-shaped part 332 of the middle member 330, and is arranged with a gap between the bottom and the bottom of the rear frame-shaped part 332 at the left and right center parts, and can slide into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

To be more specific, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower part 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame part 332 from the front and back at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 is provided with a thick wall portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, there is a gap due to the lack of this wall thickness. The slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper part 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front and rear directions.

Therefore, by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a glittering effect, and further, the back side of the intervening member 164 Visibility in the range can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it can appear as if light is emitting from above and below the specific winning hole 65a.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left and right center position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged at the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the field of view and it will not be good. Since it cannot be visually recognized, sufficient effects can be achieved if it is formed within the arrangement gap of at least one pair of detection sensors SE1.

Note that the lower part 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate light toward the sealing member 313 and the part disposed below the sealing member 313 through which the sphere flows, but the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

19 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 19 and 20, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and include a probability change detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 that have a common function. The probability change detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from the detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is a ball entering sensor that causes a payout of a prize ball. That is, when it is detected that the ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind the ball, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls for each detection) are paid out. The money is paid out to the player by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but is used as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the jackpot game by detecting the ball entering. Function.

Note that, as described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to the variable probability state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not a jackpot will be won next time.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 covers the upper side of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11 is The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member, and is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the flow path side concave, the flowing ball can be smoothly directed toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 is retracted backward from above the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and is inserted into the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11. Passage of the ball is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, but has passed only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the types of jackpots are variable jackpot and normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 are prepared for each type of jackpot.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variable jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, details of the control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, many fraudulent acts in which the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is illegally changed have been discovered, and countermeasures against such acts are important.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and sliding portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are placed on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is placed on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the recess of the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion inserted into the mounting portion 378 to the rear side. This is a normal operating mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraud may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed to the back side, thereby attempting to fraudulently create a state in which the ball can enter the accurate change detection sensor SE11. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 is arranged below the bottom part of the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18). When passing the thin metal wire through the path forming portion 336 and pressing it against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press it against the front end of the thin plate portion 371, and the wire must be pressed against the upper protruding portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 has a curved surface shape that releases the load to the left and right sides as described above, so even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load cannot be released to the left and right sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is incorrectly displaced to the rear position.

Furthermore, in addition to the fact that the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but winds in a spiral, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged far from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the back side. (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in many cases, the configuration was such that the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 was maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. However, the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. In contrast, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 to be difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be designed freely. You can increase the degree.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire passed through the third flow path forming section 336, the thin metal wire itself will cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming section 336. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit that the player obtains varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so avoid balls that enter the ball incorrectly as much as possible. It is advisable to avoid it.

Conventional models are usually configured to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the ball entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is permitted, but in this embodiment, the probability variation detection In the state where the ball enters the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), there is no movable member that restricts the ball entering the normal detection sensor SE12, and the ball does not enter the normal detection sensor SE12 either. This is a configuration that allows for

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls flowing down passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the probability variation state after the jackpot game is ensured. In this embodiment, based on this idea, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. Further, since no movable members are disposed, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable members is not required, and the usage life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifespan of the movable members.

On the other hand, as a device other than the movable member, in order to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 were improved. The shape and shape have been devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position is provided in a portion fixedly disposed inside the flow path (i.e., a protrusion). This is achieved by the shape of the mounting portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, we will explain how to improve the shape of the flow path. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction (the partition plate part 338 side) in the transverse direction. (See Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set to be similar in angle and direction to the longitudinal direction inclination of the second flow path forming part 335, so that the inclination from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336 is The bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (the bouncing in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338) can be reduced.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be placed on the side close to the partition plate part 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the rear position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate part 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the left-right direction path of the flow path constituted by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path forming part 335. Since the inclination direction is on the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated inward in the left-right direction. This can also reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 located apart from the partition plate section 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be explained. The ball that has flowed down the third flow path forming part 336 is first placed close to the left and right inner protrusions 318 . The left and right inner protruding portion 318 is the smallest of the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is disposed on the front side, it comes into contact with the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 while sliding on the partition plate section 338 without leaking.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as downwardly concave curved surfaces when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is more horizontal than the front end side of the protrusion. It is formed to expand outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and has come into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows downward. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not alone determine whether the downward direction of the ball is downward or outward to the left and right; Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after contacting the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained separately. When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protrusion 376 and the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding end portion of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protruding portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the direction of flow of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface that starts from the left and right inner sides and ends at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose ending point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See Figure 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outer sides, and the ball, which is given momentum to the left and right outer sides by contacting with the left and right inner protrusions 318, utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows outward to the left and right, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the ball bouncing, the ball can flow down smoothly. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the downward direction of the ball but to suppress the ball's bounce, its shape is significantly different from the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, and the protruding ends are connected to the probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front side than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right external protrusions 319 When the provided portion 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be located on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right externally protruded portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a backward component to the ball, so that the ball does not flow back to the front side. can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion 376 are retracted to the rear of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, so that the ball is moved closer to the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317. flows in contact with.

The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal line passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is located directly behind the position, it is easy to apply a load to the abutting ball with the left and right components suppressed. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely downward to the front because the protruding tip of the longitudinally long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that did not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318 is loaded obliquely forward and downward by the load from the front-rear long protrusions 317, and flows toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Here, there is a possibility that the ball may rebound to the front side (reverse flow occurs) depending on the impact point at the time of collision with the front-rear long protrusion 317, but in this embodiment, as described above, Since the ball is forced diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the mounting portion 318, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball will not be able to reach the rear end of the lower bottom of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the ball. , it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the liquid only collides with the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see FIG. 19) and flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the rear position and the ball flows toward the definite variation detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the front position and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced from the left and right inner protrusions 318 toward the left and right outer sides due to the load. This use will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position, and while the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 When 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load will be applied to the ball, and a load will be applied to the ball in a direction (forward) that will cause the flow to flow backward through the third flow path forming part 336. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 that is in operation can be eliminated, so there is a possibility that the ball will flow backwards. can be made less sensitive.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without exception. The effect of guiding the ball that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow backwards.

Further, the opening operation (movement from the front position to the rear position) of the slide displacement member 370 is not an operation in a direction opposed to the ball, but a movement away from the ball. Even if an action is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that would push the ball back toward the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, even if the opening operation is controlled to be executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, it is thought that the backflow of the balls will not be likely to occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still in the preliminary stage of flowing outward to the left and right), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and it is easy to shift it to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 performs an opening operation while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the previous rolling. , it is possible to easily guide the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, which includes the above-mentioned sorting device 300, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be explained. In the following, as an example, cases will be explained in which the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different.

21 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, play the game by keeping your head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a horizontal line of sight or in a direction that is inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is tilted downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly by comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that in FIGS. 21 to 23, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state for convenience.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated in imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for ease of understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 disposed at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half disposed on the lower part 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, the sealing member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, so when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the area around the sealing member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. Since the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be drawn to the attention.

Note that on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted (see FIG. 18). Thereby, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually recognized as being stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processed surface 332e, and the area around the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Note that the light emission control is not limited in any way, but for example, it may be controlled to irradiate the sealing member 313 with light in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third channel forming part 336 during a jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the seal member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 disposed directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 emits light, while when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 is caused to emit light. When the ball enters the ball, by controlling the light emitting means 351, which is usually placed directly above the detection sensor SE12, to emit light, the player can be informed of the location where the ball has passed.

Light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a vertically spread range (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path forming part 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to grasp changes due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is narrower, compared to the direction seen in FIG. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to confirm the change in the downward flow mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Note that since the placement through hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening with a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370, the inside of the rear frame portion 332 The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) located in the front panel can be hidden so that it is difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize opening 65a during the round game and flow down each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of balls are arranged in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the balls on the back side is obstructed by the balls on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of balls are arranged in the third flow path forming part 336, those balls are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the ball on the far side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

Further, when the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side, it flows outward from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right. After the ball comes off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion processed surface 333b of the front frame part 333, so the movement of the ball during the process of coming off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction It is preferable to grasp the flow from the downstream end position (ball P1 position) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (ball P2 position) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a ball (a ball that is slightly displaced from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction), the ball that is in the process of coming off from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction is hidden by that ball.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the variable detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether or not the direction of flow of the ball has been switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. This can be done by visually checking, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the vicinity of the right edge. In contrast, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and right side of the third flow path configuration part 336 The ball is configured to be able to flow down along a path including around the edge (movement from the position of the ball P1 to the position of the ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, a situation may arise in which it is not possible to ascertain whether the ball has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the balls flowing through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and the balls flowing through the second flow path forming part 335 are clearly separated by the vertical arrangement, so the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball becomes a blindfold. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized when viewed from the direction becomes smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 flows diagonally downward to the right, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, and then heads toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. The downstream route and the downstream route toward the normal detection sensor SE12 are switched. Therefore, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than when the ball's falling path is switched by either the ball flowing straight down or the ball's flowing direction being switched to the right.

Another possible mode of switching is a case where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched either directly down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inward protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming part 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball is displaced below the bottom of the third flow path forming part 336. By falling (falling by the vertical difference between the lower bottom upper surface of the third flow path forming part 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate part 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is attached to the third flow path forming part 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the ball, the ball is also partially hidden by the front frame portion 333 by displacing the ball to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, the visible area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the player's perspective becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the downstream direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336, , each has its advantages and disadvantages. This allows the player to adjust and select his or her preferred viewing method, rather than requiring the player to play the game in a single-minded way, even when it comes to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion 336 can be in a state as if removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized.

Regarding the directional views in FIGS. 22 and 23, visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, so the thickness of the members allows for transparency. Because there is less light, visibility will be obstructed.

Since the range in which the field of view is obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 in the directional view in FIG. 23 than in the directional view in FIG. 22. There is sex.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is difficult to occur (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it is possible to avoid poor visibility of the sorting device 300.

Even the parts that cannot be made flat due to functionality are formed so as to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support parts 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are designed to prevent players looking at the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 from obstructing the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is located outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thinly with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the ball that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65a flows down and flows down towards the out opening 71. The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be explained.

22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that flows down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. The ball deviated to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portion 162b and the extended portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 are located below the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 cause each flow path to be It is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area, similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. , similar to the ball flowing down the second channel forming part 335, has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the gaming area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path forming section 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same (left and right center position), by moving the player's line of sight up and down, the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the constituent parts 336 are visible.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the gaming area can easily enter the specific winning hole 65a efficiently (or whether the number of wasted balls during the jackpot game can be reduced) may deviate and form the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. 162c (or whether useless balls frequently occur during a jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path configuration section 336 by the balls flowing down. can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. In the case where the player's line of sight deviates from the inner rail 61, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

Normally, a ball heading toward the out port 71 is considered a waste ball and does not have any effect in the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, the player's line of sight is directed toward the ball heading toward the out port 71. It can have a role of guiding the flow path to the third flow path forming part 336.

Note that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming part 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path forming part 335. There is sex.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 and an electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and a third flow path configuration part 336 is arranged below the left-right middle position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so the ball can be prevented from flowing down the front side of the third channel forming part 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its rear end portion is reduced due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the time required for the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the shape growth of the channel forming parts 334 to 336, but this arrangement is likely to cause this problem. Efforts are being made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path forming part 336. is formed short.

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the lower rear of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), the player's line of sight frequently occurs diagonally downward to the rear as shown in FIG. 23. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so closely that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 bites into the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a configured to be long on the left and right and passes through the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends has a symmetrical flow path configuration. It is collected at the lower left and right center side of the specific winning a prize opening 65a via the sections 334 to 336. Thereby, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left and right direction. In addition, since the structure required as the downward flow path of the ball can be made so that the horizontal length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. can.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning a prize opening 65a close to the out opening 71, but instead of having a structure in which the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, the second flow path forming part 335 By adopting a structure in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path structure section 335 by the third flow path structure section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387) An opening) can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path forming portion 335. Thereby, the vertical distance between the specific winning a prize opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by being able to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's perspective, it is possible to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370, so that it is possible to Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area can be improved.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning hole 65a can be placed near the lower end of the gaming area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a symmetrical gaming area.

Next, an example of the flow of the ball after it enters the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessory (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into consideration will be described.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down in order through the first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is approximately 0.3 seconds. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds for it to pass through the second flow path forming part 335, and it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration section 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball will be placed at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 for 0.9 seconds. The ball is configured so that it will never reach the detection sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, it is possible to design the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 without fear of hitting the ball incorrectly.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winnings to the V winning sensor, which is commonly found in pachinko machines equipped with a V-probability variable attacker, there is a control to release the opening/closing board for a short time at the start of the round game R. control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. As a result, the operation mode of the opening/closing board that opens and closes the specific winning hole becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment where he or she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-probability variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the V-probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, the ball that enters the ball immediately after the release of the V-probability variable attacker On the contrary, the entering ball produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the ball), so it is not necessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering immediately after release. .

Note that the time required for the ball to pass can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth, uneven, etc.).

With reference to FIG. 24, the contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 19", and the jackpot A2 is associated with and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 39" is defined in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot B2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "40 to 49" (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot C1 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 79" (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C1, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot C2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, which will be described later. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 140) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140), a 15-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery, you can get a larger amount of payout prize balls than if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to increase the motivation for playing the game for drawing No. 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will become large. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, which has the disadvantage that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, the special symbol 2 lottery By setting the operation pattern of the variable prize winning device 65 for the jackpot in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and highlight only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game. .

That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the special symbol 2 lottery will be delayed, so it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (time efficient for paying out prize balls).

Note that the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled according to the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacement operation, and increase the player's interest.

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with good profit balance) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for a normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the winning of the normal symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing time-based changes in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below. In addition, in the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In addition, in this control example, the drive mode differs depending on the jackpot type only in the first round, and the drive mode is common from the second round onward. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be explained.

In the case of jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "balls entering consecutively"). It is not our intention to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible for one ball to arrive at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a and enter the specific winning hole 65a at once.

In the case of jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific prize opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As mentioned above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is based on the idea that the time is shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, and that the ball passes through the third flow path forming part. This is set based on the idea that the time is longer than the time required to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a, Even if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball disposed in the third flow path forming part 336, regardless of the timing of the ball's entry. (See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming conspicuous, and attract attention to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball enters the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336, so there is a low possibility that the line of sight will be obstructed by the ball, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming part 335 is arranged close to the front plate part of the fixed member 161 and closer to the front side than the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight is tends to collect in the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is This makes it easier to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, each of the channel forming parts 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the left and right centers, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on one side of the left and right, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. By paying attention to the rear of the third flow path constituting section 336 on the side that is not being moved, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the falling balls (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving the attention to the ball. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily visually confirm whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 seconds. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time to allow a plurality of balls to enter in a row on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "entering with consecutive balls").

In this control example, the firing interval of the balls is set at 0.6 second intervals, so even if the falling interval of the balls has not changed from the time of firing, the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. During this time, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 seconds, the next ball passes through each channel forming section 334 before two balls pass through each channel forming section 334 to 336. - 336 can be regulated.

In the case of jackpot B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In addition, in the case of jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot B1, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot B2, the ball that has passed through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12. pass through.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. This may reduce the visibility of the ball downstream. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the case of jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the first The opening/closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

In this control example, since the opening/closing plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the next ball It may also occur that the ball enters the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, in the third operation pattern, the visibility of the balls arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher than that of the balls arranged on the upstream side. It is easy to cause a situation where it deteriorates.

In the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Furthermore, in the case of jackpot C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 normally It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

In this way, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state. Since the time required to reach the ball is controlled from the structure, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball jamming.

At this time, the appearance of each of the channel components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two balls arranged in each of the channel components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two balls placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of the ball on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the third operation pattern, there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the round game R, so compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the balls tends to become chaotic. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed quickly. In other words, the round end condition (elapse of the round playing time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls) of a specified number of pachinko balls. It is easy to meet the winning requirement early, and it is possible to avoid prolonging the jackpot game.

In particular, for the special symbol 2 jackpot, there is a 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while daringly allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, it is possible to realize the progress of the jackpot game in a short time by giving priority to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in jackpot games.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round round game R ends, the timer means uses an electromagnetic solenoid to keep the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. 165c, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open the opening/closing plate 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. After the second round, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is ejected (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

Thereafter, similarly to the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced between a closed state and an open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game is controlled and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Note that in this control example, a case has been described in which the short opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or it may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to the present control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b, and each flow is The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 disposed downstream of the path configuration parts 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration part 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball by the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the downstream side of the third flow path forming section 336 can be motivated to devise the manner in which the ball is launched.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of balls being placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time. By intentionally widening the firing interval of the balls (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the 1st operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning a prize opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R, there is a slight interval (for example, 1.0 seconds), and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. Also good. In this case, a situation is avoided in which the ball is placed in the third flow path forming part 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing when 0.8 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is ejected is set aside, the period until the prescribed number of balls enters the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode that widens the pitch interval between balls and the firing mode that increases the period until the ball is launched is maintained when the ball enters on the left side, and the ball is maintained in any firing mode when the ball enters on the right side. Even if you play the game by firing, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, at least the first ball is fired to the right side, and some (for example, the second) ball is fired as a firing mode in which the ball aimed at the specific winning hole 65a is shot to the left and right. All you have to do is shoot the ball to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, the focus is not on the balls flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but on the balls flowing down the left flow path, thereby avoiding the line of sight being obstructed by other balls. At the same time, it is possible to visually check whether the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly being fired toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid prolonging the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to avoid prolongation of the round game R.

Note that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to ensure that only one ball enters the left channel. In particular, it is only necessary to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left channel components 334 to 336 to one during approximately 0.9 seconds until the number of balls passing through the left channel, and for other periods. In this case, it is sufficient to hit the ball separately so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning hole 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, due to the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of nails (see FIG. 2), the ball enters the path through a small number of paths. Even in the case where the balls heading towards the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the right and left outside of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In FIG. 2, the nails are arranged asymmetrically, but the nails may be arranged symmetrically.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown so as to be visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a back case 510, a first operating unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the back case 510, and a second operating unit 700 disposed on the inner lower part of the back case 510. and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper part of the back case 510. In addition, on the inside left side of the rear case 510, there is a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED, and a substrate is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light diffusion process applied to the entire surface. A diffuser decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is located to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is located above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall part 511 of the case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 28, each of the operating units 600 to 800 is shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operating unit 600 of each of the operating units 600 to 800 has changed from a production standby state to an extended state, FIG. 30 shows a state in which the second operating unit 700 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In addition, in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the front facing surface of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated with imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member, , the view is easily obstructed by the nails provided on the base plate 60, the various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, when the operating units 600 to 800 are disposed outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front tends to decrease.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, its role is the same. Furthermore, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape projecting downward on the near side of the third operation unit 800, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86; A circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed to protrude from the inner frame side of 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball riding on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from left to right.

In FIGS. 31 and 32, a state in which the third operating unit 800 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the third operating unit 800 is individually combined, and in FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800 A combined state is illustrated.

The displacement that switches between the state in FIG. 31 and the state in FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed while the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state, it will cause damage to the surrounding decorative members. Since the decoration members 870 and 880 may collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which it is displaced downward from the performance standby state to a sufficient degree to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative members On the premise that displacements of 870 and 880 are allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details will be explained later.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the extended state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, which is slightly displaced downward from the extended state, are illustrated, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit 35 shows a state in which the third operating unit 800 has been shifted to the production standby state and the first operating unit 600 has been displaced to the extended state from the state shown in FIG. 33. Illustrated.

As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third movement unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first movement unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second movement unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state while the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the performance standby state to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in the production standby state, By changing the arrangement of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state to an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operating unit 700 can be placed in front of the other operating units 600, 800. Visual overlap can be avoided. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and back positions can be allowed).

In particular, the second operating unit 700 can be seen in a state where it is visible in an extended state closer to the opening 511a, and when it is visible in a state where it is slightly retracted from the opening 511a but close to the third operating unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as a presentation device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 performs a displacement operation on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-like member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It includes a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

In the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first performance surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the front surface is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L with reference to the arrow F-B), the third The first point of view from the perspective of a player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86 can see the second decorative rotating member 660. Face directly. In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the second presentation surface 661b facing straight ahead, the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotation member 660 is improved. can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player according to the arrangement, and also to change the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player. For the purpose of improving the posture, the posture can be changed depending on the arrangement.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight will be in the front and back direction, making it easier for the player to face the player directly, so visibility can be improved if the performance surface faces forward (in the direction of arrow F). Since the player's line of sight is more likely to be oblique as the player is placed closer to the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by slanting the performance surface to face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is also displaced. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and when the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 34), the back case 510 is By being placed in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is formed on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 from front to back when viewed from the front. It is configured so that it can be viewed by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front side of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives the player an illusion as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 has been expanded.

To be more specific, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member The left edge of the first production surface 661a of 660 and the right edge RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized generally coincide.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the extended decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front side of the plate of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it appears as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the area right end RE1. The player can visually recognize the image as if it had been enlarged beyond that point. This makes it possible to realize a surprising performance.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying a polka dot pattern on the third symbol display device 81 and making the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b a similar polka dot pattern; A certain number is written on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative part 652b in the same font as the number variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number for notifying the success or failure of the lottery). An example is given below.

As an example of associating the above-described display and decoration, for example, six colors out of seven colors making up the rainbow are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b remains. An example in which a wooden stick is displayed in one color, or a wooden stick arranged with its right end aligned with the right end RE1 of the area on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operation unit 600 is decorated in such a way that it makes one think of ignition when the first operating unit 600 is extended.

Note that the presentation mode of the overhanging decoration section 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decoration section 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, so It is possible to avoid restrictions on the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when expanding the display area.

Moreover, the object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. , the decoration of the overhanging decorative part 652b and the decoration formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870, the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering part 875, the second covering part 875). decoration of the installation part 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured with a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is connected to the second decorative rotating member 660. By performing a relative displacement based on the reference value, the configuration is such that the player can see different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the back case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixing means 610.

The fixing means 610 fixes the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 disposed opposite to the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 and the base member 611 disposed on the front side of the base member 611. A front lid member 612 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement part 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement part 613, and a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that includes a mixture of straight parts and curved parts, and its details and operation will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle part of the main body part 621 as a long hole extending in the linear direction; A circular through hole 624 that is bored as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is brought into contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is brought into contact with the protruding piece of the front cover member 612. The structure is such that a biasing force is generated in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

In addition, in the shaft support of the cylindrical part 622, with the support fastening part 615 inserted into the cylindrical part 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female threaded part formed at the tip of the support fastening part 615. Ru. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission elongated hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be explained later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 that is fixed to a drive shaft that protrudes to the back side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

In addition, with the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into the female threaded part formed at the tip of the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

An arcuate hole 613d is formed in the front cover member 612, and extends through the cylindrical portion 613c along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes into a cylindrical shape is inserted through the cylindrical portion 634a.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member that includes a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and a plate-like extension extending in the outer radial direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. A mounting portion 634b is provided.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arcuate hole 613d, and the front side of the cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the widths of the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading changes in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes an elongated main body part 641, a cylindrical part 642 that projects from the back side of the main body part 641 and has a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and A cylindrical portion 643 protruding parallel to the cylindrical portion 642; and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be able to mesh with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 643. , a bottomed cylindrical part 645 formed in a large diameter cylindrical shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed cylindrical part 645 is arranged. and an extended support portion 646 extending toward the front side at the portion.

With the above-described configuration, driving force can be transmitted between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

Note that with the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom portion. It has an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so as to have the following shape, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and through which the cylindrical support part 651a can be inserted. Note that the details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and the details will be described later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms orthogonal rotation axes, a front rotating member 652 that is pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical part 645, and a front rotating member 652 An illumination board 653 is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and has a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side, and a rear rotating member 654 is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side. A wire receiving member 655 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space for wiring, and a fastening screw is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side. It includes a front decorative part 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is externally fitted and supported by the cylindrical part formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a diametrical position at the tip thereof. A cutout portion 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, in order from the base end, a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid. It is inserted into the guide hole 616 of the member 612, and is fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped lid part C2 into the female threaded part 651b at the tip thereof.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be movable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid part C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of its circumferential part, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is arranged to face the notch part 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electrical wiring. form.

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Other wiring is formed in the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side facing the main body member 651 on the vertically opposite side of the half-cylindrical portion 655a). through the gap) and guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end thereof, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed to mesh with each other. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the decorative overhang 652b, and the light from the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 653 lights up or blinks the decorative overhang 652b. It is considered possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical part 651d of the main body member 651 and the half-cylindrical part 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. Gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a are provided.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of their operation will be described later. In addition, the gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an illuminated board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and a wiring retaining plate 663 that is fastened and fixed to the tip ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661 (described later) rotates, the illumination board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing through the space may be twisted or disorganized, the function of the wiring retaining board 663, which has through holes for temporarily fixing the wiring, prevents the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized. The aim is to avoid being placed in

Note that in this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it may place an excessive burden on electrical wiring or It is possible to avoid a situation where the wiring gets twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (a rotation axis formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. Ru.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from coming off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illumination board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illumination board 662, the first presentation surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the front side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction. It will be done.

In this way, the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is located on the back side (the second performance surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated when the second effect surface 661b is placed on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED emits light, the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where LEDs are arranged behind the illumination board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so that the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third performance surface 661c. can also be illuminated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated board 671 on which decorative characters and figures are formed from a light-transmissive resin material so that they can be seen by the player, and which irradiates light diagonally forward to the left from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always diagonally to the right. That is, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the player's eyes are likely to be placed.

The lower edge and the right edge of the decorative fixing member 670 are raised toward the back side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge, the left edge, and the front lid member 612. This front-back gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

FIG. 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, and FIG. 42 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600. FIG. Note that to facilitate understanding of the shape, the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws are not shown.

In the production standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding into the transmission elongated hole 623. That is, at the start of displacement, inertial assistance is not obtained compared to mid-displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large. However, as in this embodiment, the displacement resistance is reduced. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the load placed on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting displacement.

Further, the same is configured to hold true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions (acting standby state position, extended state position) of the rotating member 620 is the same as that of the transmission elongated hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rearward angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are in mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted perpendicularly to the axis of rotation. The signal is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is This is the same rotation angle that occurs between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the performance standby state will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. It should be noted that illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted to facilitate understanding of the shape.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the production standby state and the intermediate production state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate production state and the extended production state. is set to .

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third presentation surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end, and a curved line (approximately arcuate shape) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. A curved portion 616b formed in the curved portion 616b.

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operating unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the production standby state and the intermediate production state is a linear displacement along the linear part 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate production state and the extended production state is a linear displacement along the curved part 616a. 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is disposed at the proximal end of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the rotating member 620 and the guide slot 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 This is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 to be along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right. has been done.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616, displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that is displaced inside the guide elongated hole 616 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effects of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620, and FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b) are FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the support member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values of the numerical values are illustrated as a downward displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount, and in FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is The rotating member 620 in the extended position is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. There is.

The guide slot 616 functions as a slot that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide slot 616 is the displacement caused by the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 being displaced as the rotating member 620 rotates. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the active side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be explained. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is caused by the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the main moving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. This occurs as a result of adding up the accompanying vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left and right direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged at 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). range). That is, there are two conditions for reducing the displacement in the vertical direction.

Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is such that a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement tends to occur.

Next, details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be explained. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be explained. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly due to its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operation unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (midway position of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a curved part 616b is combined below the straight part 616a. Thereby, when the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b, it is possible to increase the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling forcefully beyond the arrangement in the intermediate presentation state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the active side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction.

As a result, the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept in a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement manner as if it were being rotated around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be caused by utilizing the run-up by rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of displacement. The load required for displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts operating can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. The rotating direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main moving part is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). Thereby, as described above, the direction of attitude change of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being reversed).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the impression to the player that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning motion), and the second decorative rotating member 660 The displacement mode can be a forceful displacement mode.

Further, even under a situation where the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The effect caused by the curved portion 616b will be explained. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, as described above, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed of only a straight portion, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by deliberately adopting the curved portion 616b, it is intended to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The same is true for downward displacement.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the main driving side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, a direction ( The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided for displacement (leftward).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement on the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that the supported member A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

This can prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when vertically displacing the driven side of the supported member 640 from a specific initial position to a terminal position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities will be equal. If the displacement is slow at the beginning, the displacement speed increases at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction, which is shown for comparison in FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. and reaches its maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the lower end of displacement, the vertical displacement amount of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is The quantity UE1 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, and when performing an effect to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement, the first movement unit 600 This will have a negative impact on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by employing the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is set to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

In this case, the term "uniformity" does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes suppressing the magnitude of the speed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the rotating member 620 is tilted, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start side of entering the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven member 640 gradually increases as the rotation member 620 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised). At the start of driving in the case of (operation), the amount of displacement that lifts the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced, so the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined in accordance with the magnitude of the angle θ.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear teeth 652a and the gear of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, a change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44); The angle from this state to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the first production surface 661a tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third production surface 661c to the right by 45 degrees), so that the change in angle θ Accordingly, each time the state is switched from the intermediate presentation state to the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third presentation surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The presentation surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide elongated hole 616 for regulating the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660 depending on the angle θ.

As a result, even if only a sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the detection of the second decorative rotating member 660 is performed based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The placement and orientation may be determined by the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extension part 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is activated from that state. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle.

Here, the amount of change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to calculate numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Moreover, thereby, even if the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

The change in the angle θ is approximately the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the production standby state to the intermediate production state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate production state to the extended state is generally larger. It is large (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate presentation state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the presentation standby state to the intermediate presentation state. The angle change is below the level of the previous state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by being configured so that the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 changes in size, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes in size. It can be configured as follows. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easy to maintain that posture, while in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotating member 660 The rotation angle of the member 660 can be easily increased, and the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be controlled to be slow or slow. As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the position is changed at the center of the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement about the rotation axis is performed simultaneously.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement about the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight part 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved part 616b. It becomes noticeably larger when it enters.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate presentation state is reached, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is slightly moved up and down (bounces back) from the driven side arrangement of the supported member 640 in the intermediate presentation state. Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the third presentation surface 661c to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate presentation state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the posture change in the rotation direction increases. It is conspicuously visible. That is, the player can visually perceive that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously being rotated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the decorative fixing member 670. In view of integral visual recognition (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from springing back upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the rotating member 620 is It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the supported member 640 is disposed at the lower end of displacement, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 serving as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unstable due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620. Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back (in the upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620. is configured to suitably impede displacement of the . That is, in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the direction inclining toward the upper left is the short side direction, and displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from rebounding.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the active side of the supported member 640, and the case where the active side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement The displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 in is different from that in FIG.

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 will be displaced to the lower left along the displacement direction of the main moving side (rotation direction of the rotating member 620), but in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole By being guided by the guide hole 616, it is swung slightly in the left and right direction along the guide slot 616 and is displaced downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the short direction of the guide slot 616. Thereby, displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly applied to the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration disposed on the supported member 640. It is used to upwardly displace the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the more the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, when the rotational member 620 starts rotational displacement from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotational member 660. The angle θ is designed so that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( It is placed in a position facing vertically).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertia force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The load can be generated in such a manner that the moving member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand the load with a small local elastic displacement by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotational axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in front view, it is possible to more easily avoid a situation where the rotating member 620 is broken or damaged. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 is configured to withstand a load that cannot be borne by the rotating member 620 by elastically deforming. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the above-mentioned angle θ. Therefore, even if the change in the arrangement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from the production standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes. .

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the overhanging state is approximately 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates at approximately 45 degrees. Here, if the overhanging decorative part 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the production standby state, it will feel like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a manner of rotating clockwise, the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, by configuring the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be movable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a part that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the supported member 640 is changed from the extended state to the effect standby state. , the overhanging decorative portion 652b overhangs to the upper left side of the supported member 640, colliding with other movement units 800, or partially hiding the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. This may have a negative impact on the performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the active side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driven side of the supported member 640. When 640 extends toward the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third symbol display device 81 toward the retreating side, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be placed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's perspective can be determined from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the attitude change angle of the supported member 640.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the attitude of the supported member 640 are The difference between the change and the rotation angle is determined as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, it appears to the player that the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means different from the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 can be such that, from the player's perspective, there is a section in which it is a sliding movement, and there is a section in which it is a rotational movement. The displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's perspective, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640. It is influenced by the side that is dominant.

Therefore, in a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, it can be visually recognized that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is being rotated, and in a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is It can be visually recognized that the decorative portion 652b is slidingly displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 is rotatably displaceable so as to constitute a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and the case where it is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so that the displacement occurs in the opposite direction at a position midway through the displacement range.

For example, after rotationally displacing the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, control may be performed to return to the performance standby state by reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 631. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 on the way down, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stopping position accurate.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, near the intermediate effect state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, more of the driving force is distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660, so that the amount of rotation of the rotating member 620 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if this is not done, it is possible to easily stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is a player's field of view when viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). The standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the display is evacuated below the opening 511a to ensure that The state is mainly switched between the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 35).

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the peripheral parts of the up/down reversal performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the up/down reversal performance device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 has a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the back case 510, and a space between the right front plate member 710 and the back case 510. A rotating arm member 720 arranged and rotatable around the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the back case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to be able to transmit driving force to the rotating arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 configured such that the distal end of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be guided and can be moved up and down, and a left rear side that is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750 , a pair of front support members 760 that are configured as a left and right set and are fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 , and a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the back case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702 . a blindfold decorative member 768, and an elevation reversal effect device 770 configured to be able to move the elevation plate member 740 and the front support member 760 in a manner that combines elevation displacement and longitudinal displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge and forms a gap between the back case 510 and the back case 510. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 are arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) are arranged in a manner that the sensor 713 moves toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined part 714 is formed to be inclined and is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder part 774e of the lifting/lowering reversal production device 770, and a female screw part into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the back case 510 is screwed is formed. A plurality of fastened parts 718 are provided.

In the detection sensor 713, a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged at intervals such that the detection groove is arranged at a position where the detected part 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 respectively detects the position of the detected part 735 in the production standby state of the second operating unit 700, the position of the detected part 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700, and the overhang of the second operating unit 700. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and from the output result, the output is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protruding portion 511b that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and is formed into a long plate shape having a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. a support cylinder part 722 which is provided in a cylindrical shape to protrude rearward at the bent part of the main body part 721, and whose inner peripheral side shape is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion part 511b to be inserted therethrough. , a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721, and a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721; A cylindrical fastened part 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the direction of A cylindrical fastened part 725 that projects in a cylindrical shape and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side and a rear case 510 that is wrapped around the supporting cylinder part 722 in the upward direction (left side) a torsion spring SP2 that provides a biasing force in the direction of lifting the .

A step is formed on the left side of the main body portion 721 so that the arrangement is shifted toward the front side compared to the proximal side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and a support plate is placed in the gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole part 701a formed so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened part 725. A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the back case 510 toward the front side. This can prevent the rotation arm member 720 from being displaced to the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 can be stably supported. be able to.

The right side of the main body part 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming part 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the rotational direction component of the rotating arm member 720 of the load is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. , a transmission gear 733 that meshes with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 that meshes with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are respectively pivotally supported at corresponding positions by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the right front plate member 710. A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical protrusion 711a and an arcuate hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 has a detection portion 735 formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion, protruding toward the front side, and formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and a detection portion 735 extending so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protruding part 736a that protrudes cylindrical from the tip of the extending part 736 toward the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) based on the output from the detection sensor 713. is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed to be able to be inserted into the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole 723. be done.

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing this fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It includes horizontally elongated members 742 that are long on the left and right sides and are fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted therethrough, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the back side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the oblong member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 includes an elongated hole 743 that is formed in an elongated oval shape from side to side with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to be inserted therethrough, and an elongated hole 743 on the upper side of the elongated hole 743. A cylindrical part 744 protruding from the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide parts 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right from the cylindrical part 744 as a reference. Be prepared.

A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 becomes a rotating arm via the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by member 720 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up/down reversal performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the up/down reversal performance device 770 in a state that it can be moved back and forth. That is, the elevating and reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction to separate the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating/descending reversing effect device 770.

The guide section 745 is composed of a pair of left and right parts, and includes a long plate part 745a in the front and rear, and a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside. 745b.

The rotary cylinder part 745b rotates when the above-mentioned vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth, and functions as a part that guides the displacement in the front and back direction, but the details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750 is sloped in such a manner that the front side of the right side is tilted toward the front side as it goes upward, similar to the front upper slope part 714 of the right front plate member 710. and a plurality of fastened parts 752 formed with internally threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the back side of the back case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate to which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative part 768a. , is configured so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front support members 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 that is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761, with the back surface of the plate facing upward. A receiving inclined portion 762 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate part 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw part. This is the board part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714, 751, and by guiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the vertically reversing effect device 770 to this guide path, the vertically reversing device 770 moves in the front and rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. This vertical displacement will be explained below.

52(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 52(a) and 52(b), the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 53(a) and 53(b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is caused by the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 being transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 will be explained. In addition, in this description, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, and FIG. 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same thing also holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives rotational direction from the rotating arm member 720. By maximizing the displacement resistance, it is possible to easily stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the lifting/lowering reversing device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the lower side of the center frame 86, and is upwardly displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced toward the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is due to the configuration in which the rotary cylinder part 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751, and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the up/down reversal effect device 770. This is reduced by the configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotary cylinder parts 774e include a receiving slope part 762 and a front upper slope part 714, 751 which are arranged in symmetrical positions (the front upper slope part 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, (see), and by rolling the rotating cylinder part 774e around the cylindrical part 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751. Displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotary cylinder parts 745b that are arranged in the front and back, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged slightly upwardly, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed. The cylindrical portion 774e prevents excessive load from being applied to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotation axis position) of the presentation device 780 is designed to be located slightly forward of the longitudinal center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. biased in the direction. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c tend to be displaced such that the front side goes down and the rear side goes up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged in close proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, and is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged in close proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotating cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, since a gap is formed between the front rotary cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, stable rolling occurs between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. Since there is a gap between the rear rotary cylinder part 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b, it is possible to stably roll the rear rotary cylinder part 745b with the second horizontal plate 774c. Thereby, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-mentioned shape guidance. Therefore, the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the vertical reversal performance device 770 is displaced toward the front side, compared to the downward displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement becomes relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required for upwardly displacing the vertically reversing effect device 770.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it has a natural length in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the vertical reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 prevents the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the up/down reversal performance device 770 is arranged above the arrangement in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up/down reversal performance device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the stop timing may be slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate presentation state by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Furthermore, for example, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal when stop control is performed in the same way, the second operation unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and the downward movement due to its own weight will be due to the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, it is possible to move the second operation unit 700 toward the intermediate presentation state and maintain the arrangement.

Further, for example, when controlling the drive motor 731 from the extended state of the second operating unit 700 and controlling the drive motor 731 to stop so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 When it passes below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, so that it can be easily prevented from being displaced downward to a greater extent than in the intermediate effect state. Even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state by applying the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Here, the operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front and back direction along with the vertical movement will be explained. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it moves in and out of a frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable accessories are designed with emphasis on their appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted outside the center frame 86, they attract less attention from players. Appearance was often not considered, based on the assumption that it would not.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view when viewing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the inside of the center frame 86, , the line of sight reaches to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the gaming area), so if the movable accessory retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 looks bad, the player's It may reduce interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming a decorative surface on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the direction of displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is changed from the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. By making the direction of displacement follow a line that spreads out (sloping downward toward the rear), that is, the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, each decorative surface can be easily placed in the player's field of vision. It consists of

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be brought into the player's field of vision without any difficulty. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. The decorations (figures, patterns, characters, pictures, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper side is arranged in the front and back gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side of the center frame 86 when the second operation unit 700 is in standby state. Therefore, it is possible to switch between a state in which attention is focused on the ball flowing down the gaming area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state in which attention is focused on the display effect developed on the third symbol display device 81. When the player moves his/her line of sight, it is easy to see the player.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state is displayed on the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side.

Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the performance standby state so as to be easily recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously drawn to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Furthermore, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the content of the decorative surface that is visible to the player in the extended state differs. cases can arise.

For example, if the up/down reversal performance device 770 is placed in the performance standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (if missed or the operating speed is excessively fast), If the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the side, most of the front side of the decorative surface will be hidden by the game board 13 in the performance standby state, so the player cannot see the contents of the decorative surface displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The user is forced to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention paid to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the content of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up/down reversal performance device 770 in the performance standby state, and the player can visually recognize the decorative surface in the extended state. Through the installation member 787, the player can grasp the contents of the decorations (notification contents, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that were visible to the player.

As a result, for players who have missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the contents notified based on the state of the covering member 787 can be displayed on the decorative surface of the covering member 787 that is visible even in the performance standby state. Continuous notification is possible. Thereby, the attention of the covering member 787 can be maintained at a high level regardless of whether it is in the performance standby state, the extended state, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is such that it moves from being disposed on the back side of the rear end surface of the gaming area to moving forward beyond the rear end surface of the gaming area. The configuration as a displacement will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is placed on the covering member 787 side. A channel forming portion 86a is provided in a protruding manner.

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed so that the ball that jumps into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then the ball enters the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide channel for guiding the balls that have flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 once backward, then flowed forward again, and toward the first winning opening 64 provided in the gaming area. (See Figure 9). That is, due to the flow path forming portion 86a, the rear end surface BE1 of the gaming area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

The ball flowing down the channel forming part 86a has a high probability of entering the first prize opening 64, so the channel forming part 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to be focused on the channel forming portion 86a. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), since the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the channel forming part 86a, it is easy to create a state in which the performance device 780 enters the player's field of vision in the performance standby state. Can be done.

In the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700, the covering member 787 is arranged on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), and in the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, the covering member 787 The front part is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the front part of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-back position as the front-back position of the gaming area. Therefore, it can appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is moved up and down, the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction, and the front-back position of the front end surface thereof is in the extended state, and the second decoration in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is It is configured to match (match) the front and rear positions of the second presentation surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state. This means that they match, making it easier to visually recognize them as one.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the production device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate production state or production standby state than the arrangement in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operating unit 600 is lower than the arrangement in the extended state. 661 and the production device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The elevating and reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 that is cylindrical and protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , is integrally formed with the left and right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 by a pair of guide extension portions 774 extending from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side, and a connecting portion extending up and down. An upper elongated portion 775 is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and is arranged from both left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775 to the back side, and is configured to be able to guide the linear motion plate member 784 of the production device 780 in the left-right direction. a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fastened and fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the back side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device; a lower elongated portion 772 and an upper elongated portion A light emitting producing means 778 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775.

The insertion cylindrical part 773 is a part that is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a size relationship that allows it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-back direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

The guide extension part 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width is oriented in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction is oriented in the horizontal direction, and a width larger than the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is oriented in the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side, and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d are provided, and a rotary cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so as to extend inwardly from the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanding portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, and by abutting against each other, tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward is suppressed. That is, by securing the width and length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is disposed vertically opposite to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be achieved. can be suppressed.

The cylindrical portions 774d are not arranged in pairs in the vertical direction, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is disposed shifted toward the front compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclinations of the front upper inclined parts 714 and 751 are parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical parts 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclinations of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. Thereby, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and local loads can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in such a manner that the left and right pairs are arranged vertically and have internal threads formed on the inner circumferential side, and the left and right cylindrical portions 776a. A plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b are provided.

The fall-off prevention plate portion 776b includes insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portions 776a. This is a part that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical part 776a, and functions as a part to prevent the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, but the details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a pair of insertion holes 777d are formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough, and fastened to the back side. A wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and when a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, the cylindrical protrusion 777c pivotally supports the vertically inverting member 781 so that it cannot fall off. It is a part.

A fastening screw screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d, and the fastening screw allows the transmission device holding plate 777 to be inserted into the upper elongated portion 775. It is fastened and fixed.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a part for holding and fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the transmission device holding plate 777, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can also be improved.

The light emitting device 778 includes two left and right elongated plate-shaped illumination boards 778a, upper and lower, on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-transmitting board 778a arranged on the front side of the illumination boards 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed from a plastic resin material and has a light diffusion process formed thereon.

The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of detection sensors 778d disposed on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the vertically inverting member 781 of the production device 780 by having an arcuate protrusion 781d arranged in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened parts formed on the back side, and the fastened parts are inserted from the back side into insertion holes formed in the lower elongated part 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screws are screwed in and fastened and fixed, making the fastening screws inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b has insertion holes 778c formed on both left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are inserted into the female threads of the upper elongated portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusing member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and there is a possibility that it will be noticeable without countermeasures, but in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always facing the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by arranging the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted can be increased.

The production device 780 is a device that has an outer shape disposed around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-and-down reversing member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-and-down reversing member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft, and one end at each of both longitudinal ends of the up-down reversing member 781 a pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported; a pair of translational plate members 784 that have the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported and whose displacement is guided in the left-right direction by a guide portion 776; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) about a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 is a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 jointly supported with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed in a fixed phase to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a manner that cannot be removed; Covering members 787 are disposed before and after the end plate member 785d and have a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the back side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a long length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the ulnar direction toward the back side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. An arcuate protrusion 781d is provided.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side. The vertically inverting member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down reversing member 781. That is, the up-and-down reversing member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical protrusion portion 781c that is displaced as the up-and-down reversing member 781 is rotated.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission producing means 778. That is, the arcuate protrusion 781d can be placed on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the up-down reversing member 781 can be changed into two postures: one in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and one in between (the pair of detection sensors 778d (a posture in which the arcuate protrusions 781d are not arranged on both detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in the shape of a long rod (narrow plate shape), and has one side support hole 783a bored at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 781c, A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b whose inner circumferential side is formed penetratingly at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ).

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the back side is screwed into the female thread. Thereby, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the up-and-down reversing member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed into a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arcuate plate portion 784b is provided in an arc shape protruding from the center axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, and an elliptical plate portion 784b is provided in an oval shape extending parallel to the left and right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a. a pair of elongated holes 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d arranged vertically and in parallel at positions between the elongate holes 784c and protruding toward the back side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of protrusions 784e are formed as protrusions that protrude from opposing sides and extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that opens toward the back side is provided at the end of the support plate portion 784d on the inner peripheral side. A ring-shaped joint is formed between a pair of fastened parts 784f in which female threads are formed, an arrangement hole 784g formed through the cylindrical protruding part 784a and the support plate part 784d, and the shaft supporting member 786. A ring holding half 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , is provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner circumferential diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female thread is formed on the inner circumferential side. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be detached from the cylindrical protrusion 784a. It is pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is arranged in close proximity to the other cylindrical portion 783b so as to face it in the radial direction in the assembled state, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening into which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a has a fastening hole inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b. By screwing in the screws, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In its supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slid along the direction in which the elongated hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e is for regulating the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the left-right direction. The details will be described later.

The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, and the details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged as a left and right pair and pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed from a metal material into a substantially cylindrical shape, and a length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed; an end plate member 785d disposed on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a; A ring-shaped metal member 785e is arranged around the metal rod 785a in such a manner as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female thread is formed inside the ring-shaped metal member 785e, which is a portion protruding from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing part 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding portion 784e is inserted into the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship that allows sliding with the protruding portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship that restricts displacement in the left and right direction with respect to the protruding portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the horizontal width of the protrusion portion 784e, and the diameter of the deep groove portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the length of the gap between the protrusions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows the metal rod to rotate about its axis and to suppress displacement in the left and right direction.

The bevel member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 causes the bevel tooth portion 783c to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. can be assembled into.

In the assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is placed in the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off to the front side. The displacement toward the back side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to the non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a are similar to each other. The distal end portion of the cylindrical member is formed in a dimensional relationship with an interference fit, so that it is fitted and fixed.

Note that the method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be fixed using an adhesive or the like, or a female thread may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a, and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female thread. The end plate member 785d may be fastened and fixed to the metal rod 785a, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the rotation center of the end plate member 785d is can be made to easily coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the disposed metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding member of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 786b and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 is capable of holding a magnet Mg. A magnet holding half part 786c formed in a rectangular box shape is provided.

When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is inserted into the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with openings on the left and right inner sides, and are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and have different sides on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be interpreted with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface of the first main decorative surface 787a1. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side that is visible to the player, and the back surface thereof is A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed. Note that the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on a side that is visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It includes a plurality of extending portions 787c that extend toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed in a portion between the extending portions 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides. .

The extending portions 787c are formed such that their ends abut or are placed close to each other when the covering member 787 is placed close to each other (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as one unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion disposed at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emitting producing means 778 when the covering member 787 is disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26), or the upper elongated portion 775 at the upper left and right center. This is a part for visually opening the arcuate plate part, etc., and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these parts.

With the operation of the presentation device 780, the covering member 787 has two states: a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and a state in which the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52); The state can be switched between the decorative surface 787b1 facing the front side and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that changes the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-and-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an erect vertical arrangement state) of the up-and-down reversible member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(b) ) shows a state in which the up-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the erect vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in an inverted vertical arrangement state in which the up-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from an upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. Ru.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the up-down reversing member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the audio lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of presentation device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the amount of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur will be explained. These displacements do not occur at the same time and to the same extent; there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, an overview will be given. The configuration of the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down reversing member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projection 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projection 781c of the up-down reversing member 781, rotates from the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed. The pair of left and right translational plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b has been displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it is rotated approximately 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (see FIG. 55) (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends) Illustrated as

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the attitude change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, load transmission (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c is displaced upwardly. ). In addition, in FIG. 58(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are illustrated as being arranged in an overlapping manner, and this overlapping width is the same as the bevel tooth portion 783c. This is absorbed by elastic deformation between the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the up-and-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. rotate in the direction of rotation.

Note that while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is twice the angle of rotation around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to the pressure caused by the displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear tooth, and the bevel tooth member This is not enough to reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. In other words, the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation by an angle of 30 degrees) quantity).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are made of a resin material, the pressing is not performed. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the posture of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotation direction changes from the state of FIG. 57(a) to the state of FIG. 57(b). ) is maintained until the state of

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54) is caused by opposing adsorption forces.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

Furthermore, for the left-hand shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed on the front side of the end plate member 785d, similar to the right side, while the magnet Mg is placed on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See Figure 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotation member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In this embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding .

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). Then, when the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attraction force of the magnet Mg, and the relationship between the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f increases. As the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, which are released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg, are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotational direction of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the speed of the operation of the cover member 787 without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, so while reducing the burden of control design for the drive motor 782, the effect of the cover member 787 can be adjusted. The effect can be improved.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs can be delayed by the attraction force of the magnet Mg from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attraction force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is applied to the shaft rotating member. It acts effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 can be delayed by the magnetic force regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the vertical reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond the position shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above, similar effects occur. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the displacement in the left-right direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down reversing member 781 approaches the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so that the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is The amount of rotation increases. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotation operation of the up-and-down reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases first, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. As a result, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear displacement and rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 (see FIG. 55). Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be explained.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the production device 780. In FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c), the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 59(a), the effect device 780 is illustrated with the vertically inverting member 781 in an erect vertical arrangement state, and in FIG. 59(b), the effect device 780 is shown when the vertically inverting member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59(c), the production device 780 is illustrated in an inverted vertical arrangement state of the up-and-down reversing member 781.

The vertical inversion member 781 changes its state from an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

The vertical inversion member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, the reversing operation changes between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. ) The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in ).

As described above, while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the direction of rotation of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the pair of shaft rotating members 785 and the end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right rotates in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 has the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing the front side, and the left covering member 787 has the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 facing the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

As a result, during rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the left-hand covering member 787 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the right-hand covering member 787 Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being seen together.

Therefore, the contents of the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be made to be different on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information that the covering member 787 provides to the player can be reduced.

This can reduce the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Furthermore, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game can be played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. This also has the effect of making it easier to maintain the person's line of sight on the covering member 787.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 change to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first main decorative surface 787a1). When the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the production device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the visibility to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is It will be blocked by unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) and the performance device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decorative surface 787b2) becomes easier to enter the player's field of view.

In this manner, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen all together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and By preventing the side from facing the side, it does not attract attention, and is formed as a side that can attract the attention of players in the performance standby state.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed depending on the arrangement, so the presentation performance is excessively low relative to the cost of arranging the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of concealing it well). This makes it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787. It is possible to aim for

In this embodiment, since the metal member that attracts the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member. .

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 involves linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the presentation device 780 that can perform rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, by performing rotational displacement, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member disposed on the left and right 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly disposed on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, thereby making it possible to rotationally displace the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is performed only when it is determined that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state based on the output of the detection sensor 713. Executable control is based on the premise that Thereby, rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other when the up-down reversing member 781 is vertically arranged, and in this state, are arranged opposite to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 in front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement around the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close together produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be seen as one, and is a necessary configuration for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction before rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension part 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting part between the upper elongate part 775 and the lower elongate part 772, and the extension part 787c and the upper elongate part 775 It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the lower elongated portion 772 collide with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a small value.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and rotational displacement can be made less noticeable, so each decoration Since the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed without considering their appearance during rotational displacement, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Note that the timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the presentation device 780 remains the same, but the magnet Mg By changing the magnet to a magnet with a large attraction force, it is possible to avoid the collision between the above-mentioned connecting portion and the extending portion 787c, as in the present embodiment.

As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from lowering the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The insertion holes 778c are arranged asymmetrically to match the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted, it is no longer possible to arrange an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screws are made of metal and do not transmit light, they are easily visible in the dark during light-emitting effects.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c avoiding areas that are made to shine brightly to make them stand out, and as a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is made asymmetrical.

Note that it is naturally permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c laterally symmetrically. In particular, when the decorations on the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are the same, there is no disadvantage caused by symmetrically arranging the insertion holes 778c, and the illumination board 778a can be easily designed.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusing member 778b is replaced by the extending portion 787c. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and other mechanical parts are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is The shape is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right elongated parts of the upper elongated part 775 disposed in the upper elongated part 775. Further, the vertical reversing member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disc portion of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the presentation effect of the appearance of the presentation device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 26. The third operation unit 800 is disposed above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the performance standby state, and is supported by the tips of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the back case 510. This unit is configured to be able to move up and down as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portions that make up the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside are not illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801, and a fixed cylinder to which a cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical part 821 with the cylindrical part 821 inserted into the inner periphery, and a main body part 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery. A rotatably supported outer rotating member 840, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 (five in this embodiment) rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 accommodated in the held member 810. and a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disc-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing part 812 which is recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical part 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw for fixing is inserted and a through hole through which an electric wiring is inserted. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side that can receive the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840; and a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 protrude from the front side as cylindrical parts that pivotally support the transmission gear 863 in a non-removable manner, and a double cylindrical part that pivotally supports the load response gear 865 in a non-removable manner on the front side. A plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 bored in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting device such as an LED that is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and has a light emitting device such as an LED on the front side. A disk-shaped illumination board 823 and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting plate made of a light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illumination board 823 from the front side. It includes a decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical part 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fixing the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical part 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and through this penetrating part, the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 is routed to the front side and arranged behind the illumination board 823. Connected to the connector.

The illumination board 823 has an inner light emitting part 823a arranged as an LED at the vertices of a pentagon and a central position equidistant from these vertices, and an outer light emitting part 823b arranged at 15 places at equal intervals on the circumference. and. The inner light emitting section 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting section 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diametrically).

The outer light emitting section 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b is irradiated onto the plating parts 871a of the first decorative members 870 that are arranged closely to each other at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 will be irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light emitting part 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting part 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since they are arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number (in this embodiment, three) of LEDs is always directed to each first decorative member 870 regardless of the rotational orientation of the first decorative member 870. can be irradiated.

Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the amount of light LD1 irradiated onto the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, and an outer diameter side portion configured to be slidable on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. is formed.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion that projects rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 therebetween, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 is prevented. In addition, since the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength, when sliding, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotary member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load that occurs during sliding failure (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 includes a cylindrical main body part 831 having a circular flange-like part 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at a position where the circumference of the main body part 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 are fastened and fixed to the circular flange-like portion 831a in a parallel position, and a plurality of metal rods 832 are formed so that they can be inserted therethrough and are configured to be guided by the metal rods 832 so that they can be linearly displaced. A linear motion member 833 and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer side of the translation member 833.

The main body portion 831 includes the above-mentioned circular flange-like portion 831a and a plurality of sliding protrusions that extend rearward in a protrusion shape with the circular flange-like portion 831a as a base end at angular positions (5 locations) between adjacent metal rods 832. It includes a strip 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the opposite end of the circular flange-like portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and is designed to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed to have a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, the sliding protrusion 831b is placed at the angular position on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the outer rotating member 840, on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported, is loaded so as to be displaced radially outwardly. Even if the outer rotary member 840 is subjected to a movement, the sliding projection 831b can receive the displacement of the outer rotary member 840, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotary member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotary member 830 is can be maintained at a low level.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted, and by disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, mutual relative rotation is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The translational member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b arranged at intervals in the translational displacement direction and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a cylindrical shaft portion 833c extending along the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c. A recessed groove 833d is provided.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and allows the overhanging parts 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 to slide. By being fitted externally, the groove functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude in a cylindrical shape parallel to the translational direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over ¾ of the circumference (approximately 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and the decorative members 870, 880 can be attached by screwing the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841 and a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extending outward in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the main body 841 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. The extended arm portion 842 of the main body portion 841, the gear teeth 843 formed on the outer circumferential side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 are arranged such that they can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detected portion 844 extending outward is provided.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the side rod portion 851 and inserting a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are disposed so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member, and includes a proximal rod portion 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the other portions of the proximal rod portion 851. A thickened part 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end rod part 853 which extends from the front end of the thickened part 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the proximal rod part 851. , and a rotation transmitting part 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod part 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship that allows them to rotate with each other when the cylindrical protrusion 833a is inserted therethrough. A guide hole 854b, which is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a, through which the cylindrical protrusion 833b is inserted and guided, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. A bevel tooth portion 854c is formed in a shape and forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding part 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive gear 862 that is non-removably supported by the cylindrical protrusion 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 are meshed with each other so that driving force can be transmitted through gears 862, a central annular gear 864 is meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a plurality of transmission gears 864 are provided on the front side of the arrangement of the central annular gears 864. A pair of load response gears 865 are arranged offset and pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and a pair of load response gears 865 are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gears 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865 is provided.

The central annular gear 864 is formed into an annular shape, and is designed to allow the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 to be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and has a recess so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protrudes from the bottom plate toward the front side with an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation part 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed part 831c, the rear end of the main body part 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is placed in the gap between the support annular parts 864b in a dimensional relationship such that it is an intermediate fit. Or they are fitted with an interference fit dimension. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

Note that the arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equally spaced, the assembly can be done quickly by matching the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed part 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864. It becomes possible to do so. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at 72 degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Since it is thought that the influence of displacement during assembly is small, it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the spacing is uneven, the number of man-hours required to align the central ring gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 before assembling increases by one during the assembly process, but Using this arrangement, the postures of the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned.

The load response gear 865 is arranged to be able to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is 865 is configured to be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is regulated (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits driving force in one direction is configured as a set with the transmission direction being reversed, and the switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 62 and 63, a decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and illustration of a portion for configuring displacement is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the above-described inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is fixed to one of the cylindrical protruding portions 834b. It includes a first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton part 871 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a first covering part 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton part 871. , is provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered part 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmissive resin material, and the surface thereof has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on it. When the front side faces the front side, the pattern etc. can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covered portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like drawn thereon. Therefore, by changing the first covered part 875 that emits strong light through light emission control by the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered part 875, the patterns that attract the attention of players can be made different. can be set.

For example, at the same time when the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that draws attention to which first covered portion 875 is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 side from the player's perspective, the inner rotating member 830 If it is controlled to rotate, the first covering part 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed as the rotation stops, so that the player can The line of sight can be focused on the first covered portion 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton part 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a second covering part 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton part 881. , is provided.

The second skeleton part 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering part 885 so that it cannot fall off.

The second covered part 885 has a metal screw screwed and fixed at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the adjacent second covered part 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, it is possible to ensure the integrity of the second covered portion 885 in the combined state (particularly in the continuous combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covered part 885 has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the designs, etc. make it visible to the person.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the plurality (in this embodiment, five) of the second covering parts 885 are grouped by the plurality of (at least two, maximum of five) second covering parts 885. The pattern etc. is configured so that when the five second covering parts 885 form a combined state, each second covering part 885 is shaped like a circle so that it is visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front. It is decorated so that it forms part of the body.

Although the pattern etc. drawn on the second covering part 885 is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering part 885 in the serially combined state is the direction of rotation of the second decorative member 880. The design is such that there is no big difference even if the arrangement of the two is different. That is, the design does not have clear vertical and horizontal directions as a pattern, but has a design in which the outer shape does not change noticeably even when rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, the more firmly the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be integrated, the better the production performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covered part 885 side is firmly integrated by the adsorption force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that when the second covered part 885 is disposed on the front side, the combined state It is possible to improve the presentation performance in this situation.

In addition, in each second covering part 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed from front to back by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are simply replaced with metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacently provided on the opposite side, and the five second covering portions 885 are Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covered portion 875 does not accommodate a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covered portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this is intended to avoid deterioration in presentation performance.

In other words, since each of the first covered parts 875 has an independent picture drawn on it, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, the game There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the pattern etc. that is visible to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid deterioration in performance of the performance using the picture drawn on the first covering part 875.

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covered part 875 side is weak, vibrations that occur due to vertical displacement (stopping from) and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. ), the arrangement of the combined first covered portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be achieved with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. It is possible to improve the effect of the production by the covering part 875.

Due to the above-mentioned circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. The state in which it faces is also referred to as the serially combined state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state will be described.

64(a), FIG. 64(b), FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 66(a), FIG. ), FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced as the inner rotating member 830 rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840. are illustrated in chronological order.

That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in rear view and front view, and it illustrates how the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual combined state (FIG. 64(a), FIG. 66(a)). .

Note that in FIGS. 64 to 67 , the axis of the metal rod 832 is shown as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. Note that the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotational operation is also referred to as a "switching rotational operation" hereinafter), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotation member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotation member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the translational member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, since the rotation transmission section 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction, the rotation supported by the rotation transmission section 854 is Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the direct-acting member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position, and the arrangement is not fixed in the circumferential direction. Since the displacement can be maintained, the production effect during the switching rotation operation can be improved compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear displacement in the radial direction (for example, the above-mentioned reversal operation by the second operation unit 700). can be maintained high.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a rotational movement with high acceleration is generated using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the translational direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the impression that it is fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and a period ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high production effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is likely that a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotational axis of the outer rotating member 840 may become misaligned. In the embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the axis of rotation, so that each load cancels out the other. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840, thereby making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) in the rotational operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collision with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to determine the posture of the lifting arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

Furthermore, as the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced as described above, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. Displaced and at the same time displaced in the circumferential direction.

As the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to member 834 are rotated about metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. Further, the rotation direction increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the virtual position line 832F in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and since the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ) is set in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integral rotation state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in this embodiment, 180 When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (in this embodiment, 90 degrees) due to the rotation of ).

That is, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is twice the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. It does not cause any effect that slows down the rotation.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap may be created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the suction force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 is lost. No delaying effects occur.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be made smaller.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and finished early, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The promptness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 to be non-constant with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830.

For example, in the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can rotate integrally is 45 degrees. In this case, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and when the virtual position line 832F is further rotated by an angle of 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which integral rotation is possible than during rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 will be used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, the intermediate arm member 850, and the decorative members 870 and 880, but due to the above-mentioned configuration, the integral rotation operation is not possible. Since it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating from the possible state, the load on the drive motor 861 is not excessive when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating. You can avoid it from getting too big.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting the position in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connection surfaces between the first covered portion 875 and the second covered portion 885) are visible, and the decorative members 870, 880 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side part of the

During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extending arm portion 842 that is adjacent to the extending arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a that is rotatably supported is disposed. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Furthermore, by arranging the proximal rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be controlled. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and a collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, thereby receiving resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (clockwise direction in front view in the individual combined state), or in a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (in the front view counterclockwise direction in the individual combined state), If the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted (for example, from the individual combined state to the serial combined state) due to rotation in the same direction, the outer A load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued to be restricted in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotational operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotational motion").

The integral rotational movement occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, the integral rotational movement occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are disposed close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diametrically expanding direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the third operation unit 800 is on standby. An integral rotation operation can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executable and controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) allows the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to perform the switching rotation operation accompanied by the displacement in the radial direction, and the expanding operation. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without radial displacement, and any operation can be performed in both driving directions, but there is a priority order of operation. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any operation in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation continues as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. It is possible to perform a rotation operation, and it is possible to perform an integral rotation operation by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, but immediately, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in a front view. cannot be executed.

For example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted, If the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation will be executed again, and it will not be possible to immediately perform the integrated rotation operation clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

In this way, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed with respect to the rotational direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed for each rotational direction of the drive motor 861. Based on the determination result, it is possible to drive the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal performance and the reverse performance as the performance control of the third operation unit 800.

During a reversal presentation, an operation including a switching rotational operation is executed, and during a normal presentation, an operation not including a switching rotational operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage, or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after setting the third operating unit 800 to the extended state. After the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed to perform normal performance control. As a result, even if the state of the movable part cannot be determined from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 accidentally collide with surrounding decorative members. .

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, drive control during normal performance before reaching the reversal performance will be explained. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally.

Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being moved up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the up and down movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together. The elevating and lowering arm member 801 may be moved up and down while the integral rotation operation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and this switching of the output can be determined. The audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotary member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of driving time from this initial position, the outer rotary member 840 can be arbitrarily set. It can be controlled to stop in this position.

Next, drive control during reversal performance will be explained. First, during the reversal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the normal direction until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. Due to the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

If the driving motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, a series of combined states will be reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 will rotate together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is performed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reverse performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is moved downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in reverse until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in normal rotation. The forward rotation drive causes the third operation unit 800 to perform a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has started, the process returns to the normal production mode. The restrictions on the drive control during this normal performance are similar to the restrictions on the drive control explained during the normal performance that was arranged before the above-mentioned reverse performance.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for standard judgment. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced compared to the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation continues or from the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, irrespective of the attitude of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the serial combined state.

Therefore, in the case of controlling to switch to the series combination state at the timing of the jackpot announcement in the motion performance, it is possible to avoid the player guessing whether or not there will be a jackpot announcement based on the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations in the series of combinations are designed so that the contents perceived by the player do not differ greatly depending on the rotational direction arrangement of the second decoration member 880. That is, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotational direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents that the player perceives as a series of combined states at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the series combination state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, it is possible to omit the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the series combination state, so the first decorative member in the individual combination state Regardless of the attitude of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

In this manner, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 extends from the rear end where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end where the illumination board 823 is arranged. Electric wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and terminals are connected to connectors provided on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, so that the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting part 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging part 824a which bulges out to the front side in the central part side of the transparent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player in the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated into the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 are illuminated. It works to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) where the decorative member 870 is placed on the front side and a series combined state (see FIG. 32) where the decorative member 880 is placed on the front side. Therefore, the light LD1 can be used to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated part 871a of the first skeleton part 871. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated toward the first covering part 875, and the brightness of the first covering part 875 when the light LD1 is irradiated can be favorably increased.

Here, in this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it, so that the illumination direction of the light LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are different. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by rotating the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering part 875 caused by the light LD1 will easily change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 will be rotated integrally while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to carry out the effect that the user wants.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to be able to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination board 823. and is designed so that its center is located near the center of the first covered portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that its optical axis is directed in the direction of the outer diameter of the circle in which the outer light emitting part 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating part 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the light LD1 is It advances toward the side, and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with respect to the outer light emitting part 823b. As a result, light can be stably irradiated near the center of the front plate part of the first covered part 875, so that the first covered part 875 can be seen with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

Furthermore, the first skeleton part 871 is a part to which a plating process is performed in the same way as the plating process to the plating part 871a, and has an outer plating part 871b disposed outside the first covering part 875 when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b as well as the plating part 871a, but since the outer plating part 871b is arranged at the rear compared to the arrangement of the plating part 871a, the light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b. The degree of illumination can be weakened.

This avoids a situation where the intensity of the light visible outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875. be able to.

The illumination board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so all of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b is directed inside. It is not intended to be irradiated.

First, in FIG. 69, the internal structure is visible between the member edge 875a of the first covering part 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering part 885, which is arranged opposite to the member edge 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain size is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outward from the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Moreover, there is a gap between the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885, which are arranged to face the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed which exceeds the area required to avoid this.

Firstly, the gap VA2 is designed to ensure a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and to prevent the metal rod 832 from colliding with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 833. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

Second, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton parts 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical protruding part 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby attaching the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Furthermore, thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to proceed. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through equally spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visible as a light.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated in the same way. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b (for example, keeping all lights on), and the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the integrated state (see FIG. 32), the second skeleton part 881 is entirely formed of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the reflection effect of the second skeleton part 881 on the light LD1.

As a result, the light that is irradiated within the frame of the second covering part 885 can be the light (weak light) that is far from the optical axis of the light LD1, so that the second covering part 885 can be illuminated. It is possible to weaken the degree of On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially exiting from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

The frame of the second covered part 885 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) light-transmissive resin material, and a light diffusion process is formed on the inside. A light-diffusing decorative portion 885c is disposed circumferentially. Therefore, out of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusing decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusing decorative portion 885c to emit light from a surface.

This surface emitting makes it possible to make the light visible through the light-diffusing decorative portions 885c disposed in the circumferential direction uniform, and each of the light-diffusing decorative portions of the five second decorative members 880 885c can be visually recognized as an integral part by the player.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the performance performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. This integration can be achieved by visually recognizing that the light diffusing decorative portions 885c are continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance performance in the combined state when the second covered portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

The member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885 is formed in a concave shape to face the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (in contact with) the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 is , protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see FIG. 32), the first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed on the back side is visible to the player. It is possible to reduce the degree of interference, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covered portion 875 from entering the field of vision.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is placed in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both extended (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to view the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is easily recognized, which tends to reduce the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the serially combined state, the end surface 885b1 of the second covered portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation can be performed when viewed from an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be seen as a part of the second covering part 885, and the extent to which the first covering part 875 is visible can be reduced. Thereby, in the serially combined state, the second covered part 885 can be made more visible than the first covered part 875, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotary member 830, so that the inner rotary member 830 rotates, while the outer rotary member 840 acts as a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the sliding protrusion 831b is intended to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will increase, and the torque limiter 866 Therefore, the allowable value for load transmission must be increased, which tends to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. To this end, this embodiment has the following features. For example, the only supporting points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 during rotation are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , and other parts are configured to leave gaps. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the structure can be configured to easily reduce displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress displacement toward the front with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, although the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction that pushes it forward, the sliding member 825 has a plate front surface that contacts the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and back. come into contact with

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter. The protrusion portion 822b that protrudes from the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the protruding portion 822b contacts the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the entire back surface of the short diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can be done. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

Note that since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected to occur when the weight of the fastening screws increases is reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be explained. In explaining this fixing, reference will be made to FIGS. 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton part 871 into a female screw of the fastened part 876 formed at the rear part of the frame of the first covering part 875. After the first covering part 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton part 871 by screwing into the frame part 871, the overhanging part 873 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the first skeleton part 871 is screwed into the first covering part 875. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting outward) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton part 881 into a female screw of the fastened part 886 formed at the rear part of the frame of the second covering part 885. After the second covering part 885 is fastened and fixed to the second frame part 881 by screwing into the second frame part 881, the overhanging part 883 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the second frame part 881 is screwed into the second covering part 885. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting it outside) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and as the rotating member 834 is linearly displaced or rotated, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member Member 880 can be configured for linear or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging parts 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the translational member 833, thereby changing the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the translational member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832). ) is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton parts 871 and 881 from falling off from the translational member 833.

Since the skeleton parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotation The member 834 can be prevented from falling off from the translational member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotating member 834 is assembled to the translational member 833, the portions that define the arrangement of the rotational member 834 on the translational member 833 are fixed to the skeleton parts 871, 881 to which the rotational member 834 is fixed. Therefore, the number of steps for assembly and disassembly can be reduced, unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the translational member 833 is formed on the rotational member 834 itself.

That is, for example, during disassembly, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the skeleton parts 871, 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. Instead, the regulation of the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linearly moving member 833 can also be canceled. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each of the operation units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) show an operation unit 500 schematically chronologically explaining examples of combined operations of each operation unit 600 to 800. FIG. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering part 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decorations are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by letters or the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a has the word "Normal" written vertically, the second effect surface 661b has the word "activation" written horizontally, and the third effect surface 661c has the word "activation" written horizontally. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the words "Start of War," the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the words "A pinch is an opportunity," and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the words "Attack." The characters "Patience!?" are shown on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2, respectively.

Furthermore, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering part 875, and five "○" numbers are shown in the second covering part 885. ” symbol is shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is placed in a performance standby state (see FIG. 28). Note that above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

Further, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate effect state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate effect state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, the first covered portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after stopping, the third effect surface 661c is extended inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are It can make your movements lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the performance so that the expectation level of jackpot in the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700 can be visually recognized in an integrated manner.

Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700, and display effects related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operating unit 800 to the production standby state while starting at 81, the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, an LED that irradiates light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side that attracts attention can be used. By lighting up the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870. .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotated along the coaxial circle. The player may be able to visually confirm that the player is playing the game. Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 sequentially reaches the position to be irradiated with light from the LED through an integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 are both provided with vertically elongated decorations and can be visually recognized as one unit. In particular, the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, thereby enhancing the ability to be seen as an integral part.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71(a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70(b), the first operation Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a horizontally long decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operating unit 700 also has a horizontally long decoration. can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate effect state of the second operating unit 700, if the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. 71(a), the covering member 787 and The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the ability to see them as one unit can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making it appear as if the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is expanding to the right from the right edge RE1 of the area Even if the second performance surface 661b is arranged closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second performance surface 661b as if it were arranged at the center of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the second main decorative surface 787b1. The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized as one can be enhanced.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second presentation surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second presentation surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are visually recognized as one.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in an effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70(d). In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 Therefore, even if the first operating unit 600 is kept in the extended state, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the left and right sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are directed to the front side, it has been described above that it can be made in a state where it does not have discrimination ability, but as shown in FIG. 70(d), Furthermore, the player may be able to identify the content by combining different sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the content of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the drive of the second operating unit 700 in this state, pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is a loss, the state shown in FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to the state shown in FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700 by continuing the reversal from the state shown in FIG. 70(d) to the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an effect standby state. Note that above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are written horizontally, so that the player can see them as one unit. Easy to do. In addition, since the content is a series of meanings with "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In the first operation unit 600, in the performance standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them as a whole. Furthermore, since the content is a series of meanings with "Normal Time", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In this manner, in this embodiment, each of the presentation surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is made to be seen as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It consists of Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an effect standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 because the third operation unit 800 performs an integral rotation operation. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is executed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same unified state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so that the switching rotation operation is executed at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during symbol fluctuation to notify whether the jackpot has been won or not. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether or not a jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the final stage of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game is a jackpot hit or not. It is possible to maintain the same level of expectations among people. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form decorations that can be viewed individually or in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only in each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration in which each of the operation units 600 to 800 is related to each other.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be executed is affected by their arrangement. That is, if each of the operating units 600 to 800 is driven at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that component operations will collide and malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the components of other units. controlled as follows.

For example, the change of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state may be performed in any state of the second operating unit 700, and the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to be executed when it is determined that it is in the production standby state. Ru.

The change to the intermediate production state of the first operating unit 600 may be performed as long as the state of the second operating unit 700 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operating unit 700 may be performed in any state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

The change to the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700 can be performed as long as the state of the first operating unit 600 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

In the control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and no rotation is performed or only an integral rotation operation occurs, the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that the process is in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and causes the switching rotation operation is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the production standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in the production standby state. be done.

As described above, drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 is not possible at arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of members of other units.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the balls once flow down to the front side by the sorting device 300 and then flow down to the rear, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by forming a plurality of path bends or by forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a part that flows down toward the front side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the falling of the ball is blocked by contact. Any shape that can be used is fine. For example, it may be configured with an inclined planar shape, or may be formed with a large number of small protrusions protruding from the planar surface, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case is explained in which the ball flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right center portions of the specific prize opening 65a, and the ball may be formed to be able to directly flow into the third flow path forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one ball at a time, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a as a group, the ball can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning a prize opening 65a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming section 335. Furthermore, in this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left-right direction, or immediately after flowing down in the front-rear direction (flowing down towards the near side). Branching to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may also occur.

In the first embodiment described above, the channel directions and inclinations of the flow channel components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of "laying down" that is routinely performed.

Laying refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 not in a vertical position but in a tilted state in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a position where it is tilted backwards by approximately one degree. Compared to the explanation of the above-mentioned sorting device 300 alone (state without aging), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front and back direction. The meaning of the slope of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is downwardly inclined by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although they are designed to be inclined, when considering the installation angle, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path that slopes downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, regarding the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly different in the second flow path configuration section 335. becomes smaller. Therefore, since the speed of the ball flowing down in the left and right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than passing through the third flow path forming part 336. It can be passed between.

In this way, the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the rest of the Pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path forming part 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of bending (approximately 1 degree), the direction of flow of the ball in the flow path forming parts 334, 336 will change depending on the quality of bending (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the tilt angle.

In addition, in a configuration in which the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front and back direction, and the flow path is visible, slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the flow path may cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be ascertained. If you really want to understand the degree of aging, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured to be easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are arranged around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "staleness" cannot be ascertained from the slight difference in the velocity of the ball. 162 are arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged on the lower side to reduce visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made poor except from the normal player's line of sight (in the range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 to determine the degree of "slumber" of the Pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slope of the first flow path forming part 334 is larger than the slope of the third flow path forming part 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, this slope relationship may be reversed, or the slopes may be configured with the same slope.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape or may have a stepwise bent flow path shape.

Furthermore, although the flow path is configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or may be bent at an obtuse angle at the connection point. Additionally, crunes may be employed as each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

Although the first embodiment described above is designed such that the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming section 336 is 0.3 seconds, the design is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed such that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is transferred to the ball on the downstream side. In this case, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the balls flowing down.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protrusions are provided that are elongated and protrude alternately from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the downward direction of the game ball, and the protrusions collide with the game balls. It may also be configured to slow down the ball. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the path length.

Note that the deceleration protrusions may be arranged evenly over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, by forming a protrusion only in the third flow path configuration part 336 without forming a protrusion in the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335, the third flow path configuration part 336 It is possible to configure the ball to flow slowly down the third flow path forming part 336 while allowing the ball to reach the point quickly.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are provided may be such that they are protruded alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the ball's downward path, or they may be protruded from the bottom to the top at a predetermined interval. You can also go in that direction.

In the case of a protrusion from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer walls toward the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side but toward the partition plate section 338 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of protruding upward from the bottom, the protrusion itself may function as a cover for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the height and position of the protrusion in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

Note that the protrusion may be formed to be movable in and out. In this case, it may be possible to stop the ball from flowing down in the extended state and to resume the ball's flow when the ball is in the sunken state.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described where the user is blindfolded by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be hidden by the decorative member. This decorative member may be driven or may be operated by the weight of the ball.

Furthermore, when the ball is used to blind the user, the ball is not limited to being placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is disposed on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the ball is disposed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If this is done, a blinding function can be created.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be placed behind the gaming area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning hole 63 may be blindfolded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the channel forming portions 334 to 336 are formed from linear channels capable of guiding balls one by one, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path with multiple branches, or the flow path width may be large or small, and in areas where the flow path width is large, balls may easily accumulate. may be configured.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a blinding effect is produced by the ball heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be hidden by the discharge path and a ball disposed in the discharge path.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a exclusively passes through the first flow path configuration section 334 and flows to the second flow path configuration section 335 side (near side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-like distribution mechanism that distributes the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path configuration part 335, so that some of the balls are sorted. The balls may flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device so as to operate in a constant manner from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power on of the Pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of ball entering changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball enters exceeding the count number (10 pieces/round) (excess winning), the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side. It's okay. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second channel forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of paid out excess prize balls, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

For example, in a configuration where the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full) and the ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the second channel forming part 335 side. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

When the displacement is performed by the weight of the balls, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or a different action may be performed depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning hole 65a, The balls may also flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. Also, the reverse is also possible.

Further, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the time for the ball to flow down from the specific prize opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, a certain number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and subsequent balls are The liquid may be discharged without passing through the flow path forming section 335. Thereby, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the gaming area. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the specific winning hole 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or when viewed from the front. It may be configured to be placed on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be made to be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player obtains from the falling ball on the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. You can easily check whether you have earned it or not.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 may be arranged in such a manner that the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336. Also good. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path forming section 336.

In the first embodiment described above, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach the ball, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be caused to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows to follow the leading ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Here, if the trailing ball is in a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the front ball, the player can set the timing at which the flow of the front ball changes toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 (downward) to the trailing ball. It is hidden and cannot be seen. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball does not enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effect of the time saving state and the probability variation state can be made similar to maintain the player's sense of expectation. In a gaming machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, The degree of freedom in the downward direction of the ball is increased by arranging a It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 and each of the protrusions 317 to 319 are formed separately, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the respective protrusions 317 to 319 may be configured to protrude from the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as the operation pattern Y in which the possibility of being hidden by a ball is taken into account, but the operation pattern is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be incorporated to cause the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the ball.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed depending on the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide elongated hole 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed using magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, a plurality of positions can be formed where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ while the rotating member 620 is rotating. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape that allows the supported member 640 to be guided so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the guide slot 616 is fixed, but the guide hole 616 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is changed by a predetermined switching means (for example, another drive device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide elongated hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured to be able to change shape.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 and the first presentation surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and to the left, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured such that the performance surface is directed forward and diagonally to the right when it is placed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or when it is placed on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The display surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (downward) in the front direction.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal side of the displacement, but the structure is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member functions favorably to ensure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a horizontally sliding member is fixed to the active side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.) limited to. On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (angle b1 etc.) can be used. Note that, regardless of this favorable effect, a linear sliding member may be connected to the active side of the supported member 640.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and the three sides intersecting at right angles are decorated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured to be stop controllable in a posture with each side facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at right angles, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the front-rear component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the second operating unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is disposed near the elongated hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet is configured to generate an attractive force with a magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710, and this attractive force It may be arranged so that this is more likely to occur in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when using the coil spring CS2, the biasing force is not limited to one that is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured so that the biasing force is generated in response to the expansion displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of using the elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode may be adopted in which it protrudes to the front side by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from below to the front, or the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be extended forward from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction so that the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized together, thereby reducing the discriminating ability. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, instead of a mode in which the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 rotate while facing the front side, it may be a mode in which they rotate while facing left and right outwards. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 commonly use the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 in the shape of a single stroke, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, depending on the design of the groove, the rotating member The rotation timing of 834 can be defined.

In the first embodiment described above, a case will be described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has switched to the integral rotation operation by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from a state in which the detected part 844 is placed on the detection sensor 813. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 when the detected part 844 is not placed on the detection sensor 813, detecting that the detected part 844 has entered the detection sensor 813 can prevent the switching rotation operation from occurring. It may be determined that the operation has switched to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in some places, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing the torque limiter 866, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to occur regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so a torque limiter is better at reducing displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plating portion 871a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is placed on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (on the inner diameter side of the circle), so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833, but during the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 When the metal rod 833 is placed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle), the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle) is exposed, making it possible to reflect the light LD1. It is.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path configuring means blinds the passing means>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the path forming means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass, and the path forming means is configured to It is characterized by comprising a displaceable means that can be placed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passing means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path forming means. Game machine A1.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and in which the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302. There is a machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the decorative board 302 makes it difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is necessary to confirm whether the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and to continue or stop shooting the game ball. It was not possible to accommodate the game mode of playing, and there was a possibility that players would feel dissatisfied. That is, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the portions related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route configuring means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, when the first game ball is easily visible, it is easier to check the flow of the first game ball and decide whether to continue or stop the game ball firing operation. Improvements can be made in related areas.

Note that the form of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is movable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means Compared to the case where other decorative members are prepared as a decorative member, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-back direction path formed with a front-back width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, since the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball, the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward-rearward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path forming means at a firing interval set in the firing device. A game machine A4 characterized in that the game ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first game ball.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path forming means at the same firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball by the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3 or A4, in the front-rear direction path, the front-side component is arranged closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A3 or A4, the forward and backward direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the passed means, so that the first game ball It is possible to easily cause a situation where the ball is hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfolding can be improved.

A gaming machine A6 in the gaming machine A5, wherein the front-side component is arranged in line of sight of the player looking at the means to be passed.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A5, a similar blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is thought that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the better the blindfold effect can be, but if the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight, When the game balls are arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the route configuring means includes a front-rear direction route formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction path thereof. A game machine A7 comprising: a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the player's line of sight can also be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left and right path, so the player cannot see the passed means. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only when the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left or right, but also when the passing means is viewed with a line of sight that is shifted left or right and looks like a peek. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the means to be passed, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This effect is significantly produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with walls. That is, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by a wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, making it easy to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the route configuring means has a first downstream route in which the game ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second downstream route in which the game ball passes in a second manner. and a downstream path, wherein the first game ball can be visually recognized at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which downstream path of the path configuration means the first game ball flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down the route configuring means, regardless of whether or not the passing means passes. , it is possible to improve attention to the game balls flowing down the route forming means.

Note that the first aspect and the second aspect are not limited at all. For example, the downward direction of the balls may be different, or the detection sensors through which the balls pass may be different.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 is provided with a branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received gaming ball, The game machine A9 is characterized in that the route configuring means is constructed such that the game balls whose falling paths are separated by a branching means are configured so that the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route in a predetermined section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game balls that reach the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball compared to the case where the flow pattern corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game balls.

In the gaming machine A9, the route forming means includes a protruding part that protrudes toward the flowing game balls, and the protruding part acts on the branching of the game balls in the branching means. Machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the protruding portion can act on the branching of the game ball, so that the structure is simpler than, for example, when the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body. can improve the durability of

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding part includes a first protruding part extending in a predetermined direction and a second protruding part extending in a direction different from the first protruding part, and the first protruding part A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion is different from the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the influence that the first protrusion has on the game ball and the influence that the second protrusion has on the game ball, depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down. can be made different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first protruding portion and second protruding portion, it is possible to produce an effect of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the downward flow mode of the game ball.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of the ball passing through the path configuring means to the passing means>
A route configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the route configuring means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuring means to pass, and the route configuring means is configured to have a higher speed than the passing means. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined part constituting an upstream side, the predetermined part being arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passing means and configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passing means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize with a decorative plate 302, and a large winning part 300 is provided. Depending on the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which the game balls may fall away from the decorative board 302, or the game balls may flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, in special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the highly visible game balls that come off the decorative board 302 and flow down are configured so that they deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player pays attention to the game ball. Since things tend to be wasted, there is a possibility that players may feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the way the game ball flows down after it has attracted attention so that it is meaningful to draw attention to.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined part placed on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of attention to the game ball can be improved; This can be associated with the game ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flown down the predetermined portion passes through the passing means, so that it is possible to improve the point that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball that has attracted attention.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means. be able to.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

Note that the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed on the display device side that easily catches players' attention, it may be placed on the prize opening side or the starting opening side, it may be placed on the front side (near side) that is easy for players to see, or it may be placed on the front side (front side) that is easy for players to see. The stage side (mainly the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball is temporarily held) is a place where the ball tends to attract attention as a place where the probability of ball landing is significantly high, and the side where the game ball is temporarily held is directly connected to winning the jackpot. The V prize opening side, the ball rental device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the area where the game ball that strayed from the ball entry opening flows down (the area where players are frustrated and follow it with their eyes), The bright side or other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, a less conspicuous side may be intentionally formed to make it relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine B1, the route configuring means includes a second predetermined part that makes the game ball that enters the route configuring means less noticeable than when the ball enters the route, and the predetermined part has a larger area than the second predetermined part. Game machine B2 is characterized in that it is placed on a conspicuous side.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, before the game ball that enters the path forming means flows down the predetermined part, the attention force is lowered in the second predetermined part, so that the game ball can flow down the predetermined part. It is possible to highlight the attention of the game ball when playing.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B1 or B2, wherein the predetermined section includes sections in which the falling speed of the gaming ball is different.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to improve the effect of attracting the player's gaze compared to the case where there is no difference in the falling velocity of the gaming balls.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that enters the path forming means reaches the predetermined part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B4, there is a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different, regardless of the magnitude of the actual falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball at any predetermined location when viewed in a predetermined direction, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and diverted from other parts. .

Note that the manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line disposed on a plane orthogonal to the front-back direction when viewed from the front may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component, or the case of displacement on a straight line and the case of displacement on a straight line that has a front-back component, The difference may be in the case where the displacement is curved or meandering, or it may be different.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B5 is provided with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce a game ball into the path forming means, and the predetermined part is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, visibility of the introducing means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to both ensure the visibility of the introduction means and improve the attention of the game ball, which has a high possibility of passing through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured to cause the game ball on the front side of the path forming means to flow downward so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passing means or the predetermined part. A gaming machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to be able to flow downward on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game ball is directed to the passing means. Since an avoidance means is provided to avoid this, it is possible to both secure the size of the game area and ensure the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means.

Note that the manner in which the game ball falls under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow downward while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or it may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or it may flow down while avoiding the position in front of the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position. It's fine, and anything else is fine.

In the gaming machine B7, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game balls cannot be accepted, and the accepting state changing means is , a game machine B8 characterized in that, in changing the state from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the game ball that has reached the accepting state changing means in the accepting state can be guided to the path configuring means side. .

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down in a bridging manner after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. Can be done.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with a dividing means that is disposed above the passing means when viewed from the front and that divides a gaming area, and that the dividing means is configured such that the game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. Characteristic game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B7 or B8, the dividing means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the passing means, so that the field of view toward the passing means can be improved. It can be made easier to secure.

Note that the mode of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes a falling surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entry hole forming means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the partition means may be a means whose shape (appearance) is fixed or a means whose shape (appearance) is variable.

In the game machine B9, the route configuring means includes an acceptance state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an acceptance state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the falling game balls cannot be accepted, and A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide the game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, it is possible to configure the game ball to be received by the partitioning means to push the game ball into the receiving state changing means while it is being received by the receiving state changing means. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that skids while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on the left-right axis is assumed as the acceptance state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the partitioning means. . A game ball that reaches the special prize opening just before the opening/closing plate is about to close is often caught between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and is moved in the forming direction of the edge ( It skids in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate.

After skidding, the game ball can reach any position in the formation range of the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate, so if at least a part of the opening/closing plate is placed above the means to be passed, There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passing means after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it becomes necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, which reduces the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate. become.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball after skidding from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.

Any one of the game machines B7 to B10 is characterized in that the game balls flowing down the route configuring means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the route configuring means are configured to flow down in a similar flowing manner. A gaming machine B11.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the game balls that may flow down the route configuring means and pass through the passed means, and the game balls that may flow down the front side of the route configuring means By making it difficult to distinguish between game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route configuring means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the game balls flowing down near the route configuring means whether the game ball can easily enter the route configuring means or when it cannot easily enter the route configuring means.

A gaming machine B12, which is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and includes a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the front side of the ball flowing down a predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the length of the route to the V entrance in a space-saving manner>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; and a first state in which a game ball can flow down to the passing means. a state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state; A game machine C1, characterized in that it is configured to allow a game ball to flow downward toward the passing means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution section 75 configured to be movable from side to side is disposed in the falling path of a game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 12, and the distribution section 75 is configured to be movable from side to side. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the direction of flow (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is essential that the allocating section 75 operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winnings in the specific area 73 and the ball being bitten by the allocating section 75, and some players may There were cases where the player felt unsure of the behavior of the portion 75 and was unable to continue playing the game with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second grand prize opening 12 to a position near the left and right center of the gaming area (near the first grand prize opening 10), the second grand prize opening 12 can be A long flow path length up to the distribution section 75 can be ensured. It is thought that this makes it possible to reduce the possibility of winning a prize in the specific area 73 by mistake.

On the other hand, if this means is implemented, it will be necessary to ensure visibility of the falling path of the game ball over a wide range from the second big prize opening 12 to the first big prize opening 10, and within this range there will be no freedom in designing the gaming area. degree is limited. That is, in order to avoid erroneous winnings in the specific area 73, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area is restricted over a wide range.

In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding incorrectly entering game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route configuring means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the route configuring means in front view is shortened to save space, the route configuring means can be inserted into the route configuring means. It is possible to secure a long time for the game ball to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route configuring means. Wrong winnings can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device for a short period of time to switch whether or not a ball can enter the constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating in a hurry. Thereby, it is possible to avoid entering the game ball by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be adopted in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed on the downstream path, or a mode may be provided in which a predetermined downstream path is provided in which the game ball flows down a downstream path having a front-back component.

In the game machine C1, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is more likely to cause the game ball to flow down than the downstream path toward the back side. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game machine C2 increases.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to ensure a long period during which the player is allowed to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down a predetermined flowing path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is better than the downstream path that flows down while maintaining the front and back position. A game machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down is increased.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to ensure a long period of time during which the player can visually see the gaming balls flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined downstream path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means is provided with a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the predetermined downstream paths are such that the game ball is positioned in front of the passing means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the game ball is placed in the front position, the visibility of the vicinity of the passing means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the area near the means to be passed.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of the front positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, it is possible to hide at least a portion of the game balls on the back side by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side than the game balls on the back side, the view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, if the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined downstream path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so it is possible to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen. It becomes possible.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the route forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the path forming means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, compared to the case where a folded path is formed, there is no need to reduce the thickness of the channel wall, so the strength of the flow path can be improved. The possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-rear passage section extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the horizontal width of the route configuring means can be suppressed, so that the pair of route configuring means can be configured with bilateral symmetry and a suppressed lateral width. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the passing means is arranged diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving section of the path forming means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C7, it is possible to easily fit the passing means and the ball receiving part of the route configuring means in the field of view of the player who views from the front side. .

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, the route configuring means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls, and a means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to accept game balls. a second receiving means in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means; Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times, and furthermore, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the manner in which the second receiving means receives the game balls, attention to the game balls can be improved.

Note that the manner in which game balls are accepted is not limited in any way. For example, game balls may be received only in the first receiving means, game balls may be received only in the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means receives game balls only. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be accepted by the means may also be used. Further, the frequency of balls entering each receiving means may be different, or the ball entering position may be different.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the first receiving means and the second receiving means A game machine C10 characterized in that the problem occurs depending on whether a game ball is received by both of the game balls.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the falling game balls, or the benefits related to the game obtained by the falling game balls (paying out prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state becoming variable after the jackpot ends, etc.) The game state may change to the normal state (falling down, etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the route configuring means is configured such that the path from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means is symmetrical.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly fired from the left or right side.

In any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted; A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change, so that the player's skill regarding shooting the game ball is improved. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

A gaming machine C13 in the gaming machine C12, characterized in that the state change mode of the acceptance state changing means is configured in a plurality of types.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C12, even when the game balls are ejected in a fixed ejection manner, the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means is improved. can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted based on the state change mode of the acceptance state change means.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that moves parallel to the downward direction of the ball>
a route forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route forming means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the route configuring means, and the state switching means is configured such that the direction of the displacement that occurs in the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine XA1 characterized in that it is configured along a direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without involving the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downward direction of the game ball, the state of the game ball in the state where the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means is By causing a displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling manner of the game ball to change. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when a game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top of it, the ball will move in the forward direction of rolling rotation relative to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the left with the game ball on top of it, the rolling rotation can be controlled against the game ball. Since a load is applied to rotate the game ball in the opposite direction, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Furthermore, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having a component not only in the rolling direction of the game ball but also in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a change in the falling pattern of the game ball to occur in a complex and irregular manner.

Due to these influences on the falling state of the game ball, the falling state of the ball riding on the state switching means can be varied in various ways during the opening/closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball becomes bored. You can concentrate on playing the game without worrying about it.

Moreover, the arrangement relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be such that it rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or it may be arranged such that it opposes the game ball in the downstream direction and collides with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in such a manner as to collide with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the closing operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is flowing down, and the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation is performed in the forward direction of the direction in which the game ball is flowing, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. It may be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that causes the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
a path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passing means; A state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means, and the state switching means is capable of guiding the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended to the front, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. Therefore, I will not provide any guidance. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the falling of the game ball (such as a frame part). There is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Since no members are required, the number of required components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the downward direction of the game ball in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set horizontally with respect to a game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in direction after the state switching means starts guiding. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guiding action by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide part may be disposed on a movable member included in the state switching means, or the guide part may be disposed on a non-movable part around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide part by the movement of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state where it is easy to approach or come into contact with it.

When the guide part is disposed on a movable member, the design must take into consideration not only the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. It is preferable to do so.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of flow of the game balls, rather than providing a wall with a planar shape perpendicular to the direction of flow, it is preferable to )-shaped wall portion makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction of causing the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

<Sequence of separation, reversal, combination, and rotation>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable so that the visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined manner of displacement, the first displacement A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable multiple times (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotating base 214 rotates and displaces, the surface visible to the player side is the same, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacing means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the visible surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable as the displacement means is displaced, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined manner includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other with respect to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together, and a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other. A game machine D2 characterized in that the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement member that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, with only the first displacement as the displacement based on the gathering part, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the gathering part is the shortest or longest, and the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced. The first displacement member and the second displacement member may appear stationary, which may reduce the production effect, but by mixing the second displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can also be caused at the terminal end. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the displacement in the predetermined manner includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visible by the third displacement, the decorations visible to the player before and after the third displacement can be noticeably different. can be set.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by adsorption or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it operates in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixation is reduced. The displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed by taking these into account.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission through gears, mechanical displacement would occur if shape deformation was not taken into consideration, but if the load associated with fixing is taken into account, elastic changes in the member due to that load will become apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to differ depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixing differs depending on the side that is visually recognized, it is possible to set the strength of the fixing on the side that is visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly combined to make it easy to see as an integral part, and the other surface is loosely combined to make it easy to see in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can be done.

Furthermore, for example, by configuring the degree of attraction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different depending on the fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. can.

Note that the manner in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape or may utilize the attraction force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed to use, for example, fixing screws, screws, or the like as the metal parts that are attracted to the magnet.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, it is displaced in the forward direction in a first displacement manner, and in the reverse direction in the first displacement manner. A game machine D5 that is configured to be displaced in a second displacement manner different from the displacement manner, and the second displacement manner is configured such that after being displaced in a predetermined manner, the game machine is displaced in the first displacement manner.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is set before the first displacement mode. Since the displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. This makes it possible to reduce the attention paid to the displacement means at the time of retreat, thereby relatively increasing the attention paid to the displacement means displaced at the production position.

With conventional machines, the manner of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after extending to the presentation position (the position in front of the liquid crystal display area) and producing the effect, before retracting to the retraction position (position outside the liquid crystal display area). Had to rotate again multiple times in the opposite direction. In this case, there was a possibility that it would become a problem that the line of sight would tend to focus on the member that is retreating from the presentation position.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Moreover, the displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

A game machine D6 in the game machine D5, wherein the displacement means includes a release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacing means can be changed by varying the operational resistance of the internal structure of the displacing means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 includes a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the displacement unit, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the surface to be viewed is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. You can change it by changing it.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light as a unit. It can be changed with .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Features gaming machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structures during displacement. can be avoided.

In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement and contraction can be performed to some extent after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress the increase in attention to the displacement means when displacing from the presentation position to the retreat position, compared to the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement manner including enlargement/contraction from the start of displacement. .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means can be reduced. Note that various types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or it may be a numerical value related to a change in the operational manner when the operational manner changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement proximal end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished, if the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the two are indistinguishable from each other.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the states of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed toward the player. It is possible to maintain high expectations of the player for the occurrence of this event.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means with multiple visible surfaces>
The displacement means includes a first visible surface and a second visible surface that are configured to be visible, and the displacement means is arranged so that the first visible surface is easily visible, and the first visible surface is in a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversing unit 71 configured to be reversible, and are configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visible surface (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the visible surface. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state where the first visible surface is easily visible and a state where the second visible surface is easy to see, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of a player who wants to look at the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of changing the arrangement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured such that the open part side is easily recognized.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the displacement means is disposed at the edge of the opening, the displacement means is closer to the back side than when it is disposed at the center of the opening. .

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is arranged at the center of the opening, the displacing means can be largely seen on the front side, and the displacing means can be placed on the edge of the opening. When the displacement means is arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of another group are configured to be difficult to see when the surface is visible.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, by applying different characters and figures to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, the displacement means A first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set that are not intended to be visually recognized are configured so that different characters and figures can be visually recognized by a player who visually recognizes them. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement means from becoming unsightly in appearance.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface. When characters or figures indicating a high expectation of a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a jackpot is displayed through the displacement means, regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means retreats from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display indicating the expectation of a jackpot can be maintained by the displacement means, so that the player who has taken his/her line of sight away from the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue displaying a display regarding the expectation of a jackpot.

Note that there are no limitations to the manner in which it is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation), the first visible surface displayed to the player side. and the set of second visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

Note that there is no limitation on the manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be connectable and separable so that they can be combined and separated. It may be made difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be made difficult to recognize by making the part relatively dark by setting the brightness and darkness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the form of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the switching operation described above, only one part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is operated facing the back side so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in a state in which some of these parts and other parts are visible at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and that the switching operation is performed with the displacement means disposed at the center of the opening part. Game machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and it is possible to improve attention to the switching action.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the first visible surface and the other portion faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Game machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is made visible during operation, and the entire first visible surface is made invisible, so that the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible aspects can be made difficult to recognize.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 includes a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to cover the second displacement means as well as the second displacement means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface to be difficult to see by the second displacement means, the production position of the displacement means can be changed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement means is displaced. A gaming machine E9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface that is visible when viewed in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the game The surface that is easy to visually recognize can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the person's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. can.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes an auxiliary means configured to be disposed close to the displacement means, in the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means. A gaming machine E11 is located apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9 or E10, there are two states in which the auxiliary means is disposed close to the displacement means so that they can be seen together, and a state where the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separately seen. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacement means gives to the player.

Note that the form of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to switch between a state where the auxiliary means is visible integrally with the displacement means and a state where it is visible separately from the displacement means. .

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between making the displacement means and the auxiliary means visible integrally or separately, so that variations in the visible mode depending on the number of members are possible. can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the arrangement means at the same time differs between sections>
A displacing means configured to be displaceable, a disposing means in which a first portion is disposed on the displacing means, and a supporting means for supporting a second portion of the displacing means, the supporting means A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion during displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a game machine that is equipped with a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotary accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see official bulletin). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted, there is a possibility that a malfunction will occur in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotary accessory 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, resulting in a low degree of freedom in displacement.

That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the arrangement means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

Note that the form of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported in a manner in which displacement is limited by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected and supported by a second movable displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by a wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range that supports the second section when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second section is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacing means is constant, the displacing speed of the disposing means can be varied, and the supporting means Since it is configured to allow a change in the displacement direction of the second portion, the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine F3 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, wherein the support means includes a restriction section that limits displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the side with larger displacement toward the side with smaller displacement, it is possible to easily stop the second portion at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

Note that the aspect of the load required for displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or pushed.

Note that the form of the restricting portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to set an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be a mode in which the direction of displacement of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means is based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that a relative displacement amount of is smaller than a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section in which the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means is small at a mid-displacement position of the displacing means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily seen together, and as a result, the displacement means and the arrangement means can be seen together. You can increase the number of easy positions.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion can be changed.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arrangement means on the supporting means side Since it is possible to change the displacement speed of the disposing means, it is possible to create an action performance in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is made variable by simple drive control (uniform speed drive) of the driving means.

A gaming machine F6, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the supporting means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to make it easier to stop the arrangement means at an early stage at the end of the displacement.

Note that the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced; A method may also be used in which the displacement of the second portion is restricted by a geometrical device such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Furthermore, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, but may also include increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved by applying a load using magnetic force or the like at the end of the displacement of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved using a biasing force such as a coil spring. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the support means is configured to track the displacement trajectory of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion, and the displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of displacement. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that the displacement locus of the displacement is configured to intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F6, the support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part due to the displacement of the first part allows the second part to be moved even when the first part stops. The return displacement (bound) of the part 2 can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7 is provided with a supported means displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex effect can be performed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arrangement means.

Note that the mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arrangement means on a predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced, or the arrangement means may be displaced at a position away from the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced (e.g. , a sliding displacement mode on a predetermined plane) may be a different displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis).

Note that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a change in posture, or it may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first part is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second part has a section in which it can be reciprocated in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first part. Game machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F8, while the first part is displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

A gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made the same as that of the displacing means with the arrangement means in between. This can give the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arrangement means includes a posture changing means that changes its posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between a first surface and a second surface as the placement means is displaced; A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in a posture facing the player when the second portion is placed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion reaches the end of displacement. Since the player can understand that the game has been reached, it is possible to configure the final stage of the performance operation by the displacement means in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine Z3 characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
BACKGROUND ART In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a rotating base disposed at the tip of a base arm is configured to be rotatable multiple times (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can maintain attention to the displacement means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to technical idea 1 includes a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member, a second displacement member, and a second displacement member. member, and is configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced in a predetermined manner of displacement.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the displacement in the predetermined manner is close to and away from a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together. and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate with respect to the gathering portion.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. .
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, by reversing the surface that is visually recognized by the third displacement, The decorations that are visible to the player can be significantly different.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening/closing plate (introduction means, acceptance state changing means, part of avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (part of partition means, avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front-rear long protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusions, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right external protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Medium member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path sections)
335 Second flow path configuration part (predetermined part, part of path configuration means, left/right direction path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path section)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 First operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a Straight part (part of support means, first range, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (attitude changing means)
661a 1st production surface (1st visible surface, 1st surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787a2 First secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting section (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second covered part (part of visible surface)
C1 Color (part of arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of the arrangement means, second part)
P1 Ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Definite change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)

Claims (3)

comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the visually recognized surface changes,
The displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and is configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced in a predetermined manner of displacement. A gaming machine that does. The displacement in the predetermined manner is a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are moved closer to each other with respect to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together.
2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first displacement member and the second displacement member include at least a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate with respect to the gathering portion. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement in the predetermined manner includes at least a third displacement in which a visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

Images